Download - Canon - Elura 10A, 20MCA - Service Manual
No. D17-6512D17-6522
Digital Video Camera
CANON INC. 2001
Canon Inc.Digital Imaging Products Service Dept.
First Edition : Sep. 2001First Print : Sep. 2001
NTSC
Video Product
ELURA20 MC AELURA10 A
ELURA20 MC AELURA10 A
c
CHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CONTENTS
1. Product Overview ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-1
2. Product Features ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-1
2-1 Comparative List for Functions and Performance -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-3
3. Performance / Functions ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-6
4. System Charts ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-13
5. Viewfinder/ LCD Display Internal Display List -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-14
5-1 Camera Mode -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-14
5-2 VCR Mode ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-18
5-3 Card Recording Mode (MC Model Only) ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-22
5-4 Card Play Mode (MC Model only) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-26
5-5 Menu Displays ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-28
5-6 Card Mix Screen Displays ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-35
5-7 Warning Display ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-40
6. Data Backup ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-42
6-1 Main Power Supply Backup --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-42
6-2 Backup by the Main Power Supply or Backup Power Supply (Button Type Lithium Primary Battery) ----------------1-42
6-3 Backup Conditions Using Switch Operation -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-43
6-3-1 Turning OFF the Power Supply -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-43
6-3-2 Other Power Switch Positions -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-44
6-3-3 Switching the Camera Mode/Switching the Program AE Mode ---------------------------------------------------1-45
7. Others -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-46
7-1 Green Mode ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-46
7-2 On-Screen -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-46
7-3 Headphone (with Docking Unit DU-300 Connected), Speaker ---------------------------------------------------------------1-46
7-4 Battery Level display, Warning Displays and (Low-Power) Power Shutoff -------------------------------------------------1-47
7-5 System Data Display -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-47
7-6 Data Code display --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-47
7-7 MP Tape Capability ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-47
7-8 Warning Buzzer ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-47
7-9 Using Analog Line, DV Recording ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-48
7-10 VIdeo ID1 Detection/Output Capability -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-48
7-11 Closed Caption Detection/Output ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-49
7-12 Audio Dubbing ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-49
7-12-1 Tape Usable for Audio Dubbing ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-49
7-12-2 Selecting an Audio Dubbing Signal Input Source ------------------------------------------------------------------1-49
7-12-3 Audio Dubbing Operation ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-49
7-13 AV Insert ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-50
7-13-1 Tape Usable for AV Insert ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-50
7-13-2 AV Insert Operation -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-50
7-14 Multi-Dial ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-50
7-15 LCD Panel/CVF (Color ViewFinder) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-51
7-15-1 Camera Mode/Camera Recording Mode -----------------------------------------------------------------------------1-51
7-15-2 VCR Mode/Card Play Mode -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-51
7-16 Memory Card System --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-51
7-16-1 Card Recording (Card Recording of Still Images) ------------------------------------------------------------------1-51
7-16-2 Copying [ ] / [ ] ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-52
7-16-3 Card Mix ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-53
7-16-4 Card Playback ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-53
7-16-5 Image Protecting Setting -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-54
7-16-6 Print Mark Setting -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-54
7-16-7 Image Erase ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-54
7-16-8 Format ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-55
7-16-9 Card Review --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-55
7-16-10 Image Setting -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-55
7-16-11 Forward Skip for Card Playback ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-56
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-1
1. Product Overview
Strategic product with a 3x recording mode, memory card functions and analog line input (iPAL) that are newly developed in the
camcorder industries. Also, it succeeds the super compact size of the ELURA2 MC A with more sophisticated exterior design and
enhances the picture quality.
2. Product Features
• Compact vertical (magnesium alloy) body
• 1/4-inch progressive scan 680,000-pixel CCD RGB primary color filters
• 2.5-inch 200,000-Pixel LCD monitor
• Digital input/output (DV jack), analog input/output AV insert function
• Card still image recording, multi-media card, SD memory card capability (MC model only)
• Card mix function (MC model only)
• SDL mode (max. recording time 240 min. : ELP mode using 80 min. tape)
• Multi-screen
• 3-element microphone
• Adequate accessories (New : 1 types of optical accessories, compact power supply)
• User-friendly card functions (Card preview, card playback jump functions)
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-2
External Appearance
Fig. 1-1
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-3
2-1 Comparative List for Functions and Performance
Item ELURA2 MC A, ELURA2 A ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A (this device)
Camera
Imaging(video) Image size 1/4-inch CCD ←
element Number of pixels Total number of pixels : 680,000 ←
Effective number of pixels : 360,000 ←
System Progressive scan ←
Filter RGB primary color filters ←
Lens Optical zoom ratio 10 × ←
Digital zoom ratio 40 × (10 × 4) ←
Focal length 3.5-35mm ←
(Converted to 35mm film) 44.7-447mm ←
F number F1.6-2.6 ←
Zoom speed Variable ←
Filter diameter 27mm ←
Minimum brightness 7.5 (3.5) lux (low-light mode NTSC: 1/30 sec) ←
Hand jitter compensation Electronic type ←
Recording function
Program AE (Full auto) ← (Auto/Sports/Portrait/Spotlight/
Surf(sand)& snow/Low-light)
Light metering Lower center weighted Full auto mode, Auto mode, Sports mode, ←
system averaged metering Portrait mode, Low light mode
Evaluation metering 128 sectors ←
(spotlight mode, surf (sand) & snow mode)
Exposure AE lock ←
adjustment Exposure compensation (after AE lock) ←
AE shift × ←
Gain setting/Higher sensitivity × ←
Backlight compensation × ←
Shutter speed High-speed shutter 6 steps ←
(1/60, 1/100, 1/250,1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000)
Slow shutter 1 step (1/30 (Low-light, AE mode)) ←
Aperture Auto iris ←
Image quality Color gain adjustment × ←
adjustment Color phase adjustment × ←
(Custom preset) Sharpness adjustment × ←
Setup adjustment × ←
WB Auto ←
Set (1 pc.) ←
Preset Outdoors/indoors ←
System TTL, 128 sectors ←
Focus Mode AF/MF ←
Manual focus Multi-dial operation ←
16:9 Recording system Vertical extension system ←
Area marker display × ←
Recording D. effect Art, black & white, sepia, mosaic ←
effects D. fade White(black)auto, wipe(right & left), scroll, mosaic White(black)auto, wipe(right & left), scroll, mosaic
Multi-screen 4/9/16 screen (MC model only) ← (MC model only)
Zebra pattern × ←
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-4
Item ELURA2 MC A, ELURA2 A ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A (this device)
Recording function
Color bar × ←
Movie Framed movie Progressive scan ←
recording Self-timer 10 sec/remote control : 2 sec ←
Interval timer × ←
Clear scan × ←
Still image Recording system Frame recording (MC model only) ← (MC model only)
recording (Field recording for card mix)
(tape) Recording time 6.5 sec. 6.5 sec. (ESP/ELP:approx. 8 sec.)
Frame processing Progressive scan ←
Still image Recording system Frame recording (MC model only) ← (MC model only)
recording Recorded image size/file system 640 (H) × 480 (V) / JPEG (MC model only) ← (MC model only)
(Card) Memory card Multi-media card Multi-media card, SD memory card
REC search ←
REC review ←
Card review × (MC model only)
Standby SW × ←
Power save(after 5-min. recording pause) Power shutoff ←
Displayed character recording × ←
Audio 16 bits 2 ch (48KHz) ←
12 bits 4 ch (32KHz)(No sync 4-ch recording)
Wind cut ON/OFF switch (for built-in microphone only) ←
EVF Size 0.44-inch (color TFT) ←
Number of pixels 113,000 pixels ←
Brightness adjustment × ←
Color adjustment × ←
Portable × ←
Monitor LCD Size 2.5-inch ←
Number of pixels 200,000 pixels ←
Brightness adjustment × ←
Portable Mirror photography capability ←
VCR
Playback Frame forward play Forward/reverse ←
system Slow play Forward/reverse ←
2× speed play Forward/reverse ←
1× speed play Forward/reverse ←
Queue/review 9.5 × speed play ←
Search Photo search ←
Date search ←
Index search × ←
Play effect D. effect Art, black & white, sepia, mosaic ←
D. fade White(black)auto, wipe(right & left), scroll, mosaic ←
Multi-screen 4/9/16 screen (MC model only) ← (MC model only)
Data code display Date display/camera data ←
Slide show (MC model only) ← (MC model only)
Card playback jump × (MC model only)
Audio dubbing ←
AV insert Digital ←
Analog ←
Zero set memory ←
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-5
Changed from D52A/B models ( : New functions)
Item ELURA2 MC A, ELURA2 A ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A (this device)
VCR
Edit function Simple edit × ←
Effects × ←
Systems
I/F(jack) Microphone input (DC 5V jack, DU-300 capability) ←
Headphone output (DU-300 capability) ←
DV jack (input/output) ←
S jack (input/output, DU-300 capability) ← (input/output, DU-300 capability)
AV jack input/output RCA pin (also used for VA) ← (also used for VA)
Edit capability LANG jack (DU-300 capability) ←
World clock ←
Character title × ←
Speaker ←
Warning buzzer ←
Tally lamp ←
Remote control 1, 2 capability ←
Accessory shoe × ←
Video ID (ID1) ←
Recording LP ←
mode SDL (E SP, E LP) ×
Custom key × ←
Index screen key × (MC model only)
Mix/slide show key × (MC model only)
DV control × ←
Main unit charging × ←
Backup power supply Button type lithium battery (CR-1616 type) ←
Battery pack power supply Lithium battery, 400 series ←
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-6
3. Performance / Functions
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
1 Type Video camcorder
2 Recording system Rotary 3-head helical scan azimuth recording.
Personal digital DVC (SD/SDL standard).
Conforms to the NTSC system (525 lines x 60 fields).
2-1 Video signal recording system Digital component recording.
SD SDL
Sampling frequency Y = 13.5MHz Y = 10.125MHz
R-Y, B-Y = 3.375MHz R-Y, B-Y = 3.375MHz
Number of quantified bits 8bits 8bits
2-2 Audio signal recording system PCM digital recording. PCM digital recording.
16-bit, 48KHz 2 channels --------
12-bit, 32KHz 2 channels 32KHz 2ch
(stereo 1, 2) (stereo1)
2-3 Tracking 2-frequency pilot type 2-frequency pilot type
2-4 Tape speed Approx. 18.81mm/sec. (SP mode) Approx. 9.41mm/sec. (ESP mode)
Approx. 12.56mm/sec. (LP mode) Approx. 6.28mm/sec. (ELP mode)
2-5 Head drum
Drum diameter 21.7mm
Speed 9000/1.001 rpm
Number of heads 3 video heads
3 Record/play times Max. 80 min. (SP mode) Max. 160 min. (ESP mode)
Max. 120 min. (LP mode) Max. 240 min. (ELP mode)
Continuous recording time BP-406 Approx. 55 min. (CVF), Approx 45 min. (LCD)
BP-412 Approx. 100 min. (CVF), Approx 80 min. (LCD)
BP-422 Approx. 200 min. (CVF), Approx 165 min. (LCD)
4 Usable video cassettes Mini-DVC specifications.
4-1 Tape type Evaporated metal tape.
4-2 Tape width 6.35mm evaporated metal tape.
4-3 Tape thickness 7µm
5 Camera
5-1 Video element 1/4 (1/4-inch) type progressive scan CCD.
5-1-1Number of pixels Total number of pixels: approx. 680,000
Effective number of pixels: approx. 360,000
5-1-2 Filters RGB primary color filters.
5-1-3 Color separation system Differential read-out type.
5-1-4 Signal configuration NTSC standard color video signal
5-1-5 Scan system 525 lines x 60 fields / 30 frames
5-2 Optical lens
5-2-1 Nominal focal length 3.5mm - 35mm
Zoom ratio Optical lens: 10× Electronic zoom: 40× (10× 4 = 40)
(Converted to 35mm film) 44.7mm - 447mm 1788mm (equivalent)
5-2-2 Nominal aperture ratio 1 : 1.6 (F2.6 at Tele photo-end)
5-2-3 Lens configuration 10 elements, 7 groups, 2 aspherical lens elements (3 surfaces) used.
5-2-4 Focusing Inner focus type. Manual focusing is also possible (by rotating the Multi dial).
5-2-5 Minimum focusing distance 10mm (autofocus at Wide). 1m (from the front of the lens) throughout the entire zoom range.
5-2-6 Power zoom Multi-step, variable speed power zoom. Slide lever type. The zoom speed is varied by the
amount of slide lever movement.
Optical zoom: approx. 2.0 sec. - approx. 21 sec.
Digital zoom: approx. 3.5 sec. - approx. 24 sec.
No manual zoom (no zoom ring).
5-2-7 Focal length indication None. There is a simple zoom display in the viewfinder.
5-2-8 Macro mechanism Wide angle end macro.
5-2-9 Minimum macro focusing distance 10mm (from front of lens).
5-2-10 Filter diameter 27mm, P0.5mm
5-2-11 Accessory lenses, filter FS-27U can be used.
5-2-12 Lens hood None.
5-2-13 Lens cap Covering type.
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-7
5-3 Hand jitter compensation Yes
5-3-1 Type Electronic type hand jitter compensaion
5-3-2 Hand jitter detection Angular velocity detecting method.
5-4 Recording modes Movie mode, photo mode (tape and card recording (card for ELURA 20 MC A only)).
5-4-1 Movie mode Normal recording and progressive scan recording.
5-4-2 Photo mode Approx. 6.5 sec. (approx, 8 sec. int the ESP mode and ELP mode) still image recording (field
recording for card mix in frame record and movie mode)
Lock display ( ) in the viewfinder after partially pressing the button. This display lights green
when the AF lock is applied.
5-4-3 Card recording CCD Prograssive still images can be recorded an still images on MMC (Multi-Media cards) or
SD (Secure Digital) memory card by pressing the Photo button int the card recording mode. A
shutter tone (pseundo) will sound at his sound at this time.
Recording system JPEG. JPEG system compressin ratio (fine/standard) available.
Conforms to DCF (Design rule for Camera File system).
Recording system JPEG system compensation ratio (irreversible) (fine/standard) available
Conforms to DCF (Design rule for Camera File system).
Number of recordable images (for SDC-8M)
Fine Approx. 50
Standard Approx. 80
The SDC-8M card supplied contains pre-recorded title images, so the above values will be
smaller when this is used. The values are merely guidelines and can vary widely depending on
the focal length used, the subject, the conditions, etc.
5-5 Exposure control
5-5-1 AE function
Program AE Full auto mode, auto mode, sports mode, portrait mode, spotlight mode,
surf (sand) & snow mode, low light mode.
5-5-2 Light metering system Below-center weighted averaging metering :
Full auto Mode, Auto Mode, Sports Mode, Portrait Mode, Low Light Mode.
Full frame averaged metering + 128-sector evaluation metering :
Spotlight Mode, Surf (Sand) & Snow Mode.
Frame division 128 sectors (16 vertical x 8 horizontal)
5-5-3 Exposure compensation function
AE lock AE lock by AE shift button operation AE lock uses the Multi-dial for Exposure compensation
(except in Full Auto mode).
Exposure Compensation volume +/−11 steps (+/−2.75EV), 0.25 aperture stop per step. Bar indicator ( ) in the
viewfinder.
5-5-4 Electronic shutter
High-speed shutter Auto mode : 1/60 sec., 1/100 sec., 1/250 sec., 1/500 sec., 1/1000 sec., 1/2000 sec.
Hand jitter compensation ON During flicker detection : 1/100 sec.
During flicker detection : 1/120 sec.
Hand jitter compensation OFF During flicker detection : 1/100 sec.
Low-speed shutter 1/30 sec. (low light mode, fixed speed)
5-6 Autofocus (AF)
5-6-1 System TTL, video signal detection auto focus type AF.
5-6-2 AF measurement area Center of screen
5-6-3 Metering frame display None.
5-6-4 AF operational range 10mm - infinity (Wide); 1m - infinity (from front of lens) throughout the entire zoom range.
5-6-5 AF operational brightness range 50 lux - 100,000 lux
5-6-6 AF mode selection Continuous AF/manual focusing. AF can be turned on and off by pressing the focus button in all
modes except full auto. (Pressing focus button)
Manual focus is displayed in the viewfinder during manual focus (AF off).
5-7 Viewfinder 0.44-inch type, color liquid crystal display (approx. 113,000 pixels), telescoping type (pull out).
Off except when the LCD monitor is stored (body side panel face) and during mirror mode.
5-7-1 Rotation No.
5-7-2 Eyepiece removal Yes.
5-7-3 Diopter adjustment range +1.5 to –5.5 diopters (eyepiece).
5-7-4 Lens configuration 2 groups, 2 elements.
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-8
5-8 LCD panel 2.5-inch type, color liquid crystals, display approx. 200,000 pixels (228 (V) × 880 (H)). TFT
active matrix drive.
RGB delta array. On except when the LCD monitor is stored (body side panel face).
Angle adjustment Yes. High angle, low angle, monitoring during mirror mode.
Data display Operation mode display, simple zoom position display, battery level display, remaining tape
display, time code, various warning. Color display. No display during mirror mode.
Relationships to the viewfinder (CVF)
*1: ELURA20 MC A only
*2: Appears in Mirror mode with menu operation.
*3: Panel displays restricted to the following for Mirror mode. (Normal viewfinder and onscreen displays)
The following marks are indicated in the upper left of screen .
• Camera mode : “” recording , “ ” recording pause,“ ”ejection
• Card recording mode : “ ” without card , “ <<<<”with card, accessing
(Mirror mode is reset in recording search and warning.)
5-9 White balance adjustment TTL, 128-sector, new white extraction type FAWB.
With set/preset (outdoors: 5,600K; indoors: 3,200K) (selection from camera menu).
Adjustment range 2,800K - 8,000K.
5-10 Digital feature function Fader, effects, multi-screen, card mix (MC model only) modes are provided.
Fader : Coupled to the start/stop button (VCR mode button), one-time execution is possible
when the fader mode is displayed (the mode display disappears when the fader ends).
Effects : Continuous effects are possible until turned off.
Multi-screen : Images are captured and displayed on several screens at fixed intervals or as
indicated manually. Displays continue until turned off.
Card mix : The sample images supplied and images recorded on cards can be mixed and
displayed with images captured with the camera.
5-10-1 Fader Audio-synchronized fader.
Auto fade (JAPAN models: White Fade; Overseas Models: Black Fade),
Wipe (Left/Right), Scroll, Mosaic Fade.
Fade time Approx. 4 sec.
5-10-2 Effects Art, Monochrome, Sepia, Mosaic.
Operated by pressing the Effects button to toggle this function ON and OFF.
5-10-3 Multi-screen
Number of screens 4 (2 × 2, 9 (3 × 3), 16 (4 × 4)
Operation mode Manual, fast (every 4 fields), normal (every 6 fields), slow (every 8 fields).
5-10-4 Card mix (MC model only)
Mix type Card chroma key, Card luminance key, Camera chroma key
Mix level adjustment 32 steps.
5-10-5 Relationship between digital features and operation mode
When execution is possible in the various modes (Card record mode, card play mode. Card mix only with the MC model.)
*1: Not possible in the movie mode or low light mode (interlace).
Camera mode/card recording *1 VCR mode/card playback *1
LCD panel position LCD panel CVF LCD panel CVF
Panel closed (panel side of body) OFF ON OFF ON
Panel closed (panel side outside) ON OFF ON OFF
Panel opened ON OFF ON OFF
Mirror (photography) mode *3 ON *2 ON ON ON
Camera modeCard recordmode Still Image Movie
VCR mode Card playbackmode
Fader × × ×Effects ×Multi-screen ×Card mix × *1 × ×
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-9
5-11 Built-in microphone Stereo microphone (electret condenser microphone used).
Stereo using on-directional microphone × 3 + electrical circuit (3-element microphone).
5-11-1 Wind cut function With on/off switch (menu selection for built-in microphone only).
5-12 Additional functions
5-12-1 Time code Recording time (0:00:00 - 7:59:59) is displayed and recorded in the sub code area.
5-12-2 Data code There is no recording time display, but the recording date/time and camera data are recorded
and can be displayed during play.
Date/time Coupling range: January 1, 2001 to December 31, 2030 (initial setting: January 1, 2001).
World time capability. Automatic setting to the date/time of travel destinations by selecting the
destination city. Daylight saving time capability. Three display modes are available for play:
date, date and time, and time (January 1, 1990 to December 31, 2089).
Camera data Values such as shutter speed and aperture value are recorded (no display during recording) and
can be displayed during play.
5-12-3 Assessory shoe None.
5-12-4 Image search function Tape can be played (forward/reverse) during camera recording pause by operating the Rec Search button.
5-12-5 Rec review function Started by operating the Rec Check button ( ) during camera recording pause.
5-12-6 Card review function Yes (MC model only) The last image recorded on the memory card is read out by operating the
REC Check button ( ) on the card recording mode. The image read out can be protected or deleted.
5-12-7 Zero set memory Yes. Tape can be forwarded or rewound continuously until the zero set memory key of the WL-
D75/WL-D76 is operated (The counter value is set to 0:00:00.) (Zero set is possible only during
recording, not during play.)
5-12-8 Remote control ON/OFF Yes. Available in both the camera recording and the VCR modes (menu selection).
5-12-9 Selftimer 10 sec. (Approximately 2 sec. when the wireless controller WL-D75/WL-D76 is used.)
5-12-10 Headphone volume adjustment Adjustment is possible using the multi-dial.
6 Recorder unit
6-1 Recording functions Camera recording, DV input recording, analog input recording.
6-1-1 Recording format Personal DVC (SD specifications).
6-1-2 Tape speed
SD specifications Approx. 18.81mm/sec. (SP mode), approx. 12.56mm/sec. (LP mode)
SDL specifikations Approx. 9.41mm/sec. (ESP mode), approx 6.28mm/sec. (ELP mode)
6-1-3 DV input recording Conforms to IEEE 1394.
Records video and audio signals from a digital video camera connected with the DV cable.
6-1-4 Analog input recording The S-video jack and AV mini-jack are used to recordanalog video and audio signals.
6-1-5 Terminal priority during recording DV jack > S-video jack > AV mini-jack
6-2 Insert recording Yes.
6-2-1 Insertable tape Only tapes with SP recording can be inserted.
6-3 Dubbing Yes (SD specification tape only)
6-3-1 Tapes usable Only tapes with 12-bit SP recording other than for audio dubbing 4-channel simultaneous re-
cordings can be used for dubbing.
6-3-2 Dubbing signal input Line (AV mini-jack) or microphone (external/internal) audio signals.
6-3-3 Dubbing selection Operate the dubbing button of the remote control in play pause status.
6-4 Play functions Standard play and special play
6-4-1 Standard play
a. Video Video recorded in the SP, LP, E SP or E LP mode
b. Audio
16-bit Sampling frequency 48KHz, 44.1KHz, 32KHz. (except for SDL specifications)
12-bit Sampling frequency 32KHz.
Play using stereo 1, stereo 2 or a mix of stereo 1 and 2 (variable mix ratio).
6-4-2 Special play Video only play
a. Freeze frame play Movie picture : pure frame play
Progressive : frame play
b. Fast forward play Approx. 9.5× speed.
c. Rewind play Approx. 9.5× speed.
d. Frame forward play Forward/reverse
e. Slow play Forward/reverse 1/5× speed (corresponds to forward/reverse 1/10× speed)
f. 1× speed play Forward/reverse
g. 2× speed play Forward/reverse 2× speed
h. Edit search Forward/reverse
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-10
6-5 Tape fast forward/rewind time
Approx. 2 min. 20 sec. (using 60-minute tape)
6-6 Input signals
6-6-1 DV jack IEEE 1394-AV/C protocol SD format signal.
6-6-2 AV mini-jack
a. Video signal NTSC standard color video signal
Impedance 75 ΩOutput signal level 1Vp-p (composite)
b. Audio signal
Signal type Stereo audio signal
Impedance 47 KΩ or more
Signal level −10dBv
6-6-3 S-video jack (with Docking Unit DU-300 connected)
Signal configuration Y/C separate video signal
Impedance 75 ΩSignal level 0.286Vp-p (composite) (color burst signal)
6-6-4 MIC jack (with docking unit DU-300 connected)
φ 3.5mm mini stereo jack
Impedance 5 KΩ or more
Signal level −57dBv (using 600ohm microphone)
6-7 Output signals
6-7-1 DV jack IEEE 1394-AV/C protocol.
6-7-2 AV mini-jack φ 3.5mm, 4-pole mini-jack.
a. Video signal
Signal configuration NTSC standard color video signal
Impedance 75 ΩSignal level 1Vp-p (composite)
b. Audio output signal
Signal type Stereo audio signal.
AV mini-jack.
Output impedance 3 KΩ or less.
Output signal level −10dBv (47-KΩ load).
Frequency response 60Hz - 16KHz (1KHz standard: +/−3dB)
Audio signal S/N ratio
Microphone input 48dB or more.
External microphone input 48dB or more (using Docking Unit DU-300).
6-7-3 S-video jack (using Docking Unit DU-300).
Signal configuration NTSC Y/C separate video signal.
Video signal 1Vp-p (Brightness + sync signal)
Color signal 0.286Vp-p (color burst signal)
Brightness signal S/N ratio 45dB or more
6-7-4 Headphone jack (using Docking Unit DU-300).
φ 3.5mm stereo mini jack.
Output impedance 150 ΩOutput signal level −25dBv (16 Ω load, maximum volume).
6-8 Memory card system (MC model only)
6-8-1 Memory card used Multi-media card, SD memory card.
6-8-2 Recordable images and image qualities
Card record mode : Camera images can be recorded by operating the Photo button. The digital
effects function and multi-screen function can also be used.
VCR mode : Still images can be recorded by operating the Photo button (half-pressing
freezes a frame and then full-pressing records) while playing a tape. Also,
DV input images can also be recorded (no tape or tape stopped) by operat-
ing the Photo button (half-pressing freezes a frame and then full-pressing
records).
Image quality when recording from tape/DV input to a card.
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-11
6-8-3 Recording system JPEG file conforms to DCF (Design rule for Camera File system) and DPOF (Digital Print
Order Format).
Card volume level CANON_DV
DCF folder and file name //DCIM/xxx CANON/AUT_yyyy.JPG xxx : folder number yyyy: file number
File numbers Files are controlled internally by folder number and file number. File numbers from 0001 to
9900 are allocated to recorded images. Up to 100 images can be saved in each folder. Numbers
from 100 - 998 are allocated to the folders.
Relationship between folder numbers and file numbers
Recorded images start from 101-0101. Basically, the numbers are allocated so that they are
larger than the directory numbers and file numbers of the files stored in the multi-media card.
6-8-4 Recorded image size 640 (H) × 480 (V)
6-8-5 Number of images recorded SDC-8M
Fine mode Approx. 50
Standard Approx. 80
6-8-6 Card format The Format instruction on the menu of the body is used to format cards. Correct operation
cannot be guaranteed when a personal computer is used for formatting because formatting may
vary depending on the OS.
6-9 Digital feature functions Fader, effects, multi-screen modes are provided.
Coupled to the / button. Can be executed once when Fade mode is displayed (mode display
turns OFF when fader ends).
Effects : Continuous effects are possible until turned OFF.
Multi-screen : Images are captured and displayed on several screens at fixed intervals or as
indicated manually. Displays continue until turned OFF.
6-9-1 Fader Audio-synchronized fader.
Auto fade (Japanese models : white fade; overseas models : black fade), wipe (left/right), scroll
and mosaic fade.
Fade time Approx. 4 sec.
6-9-2 Effects Art, monochrome, sepia, mosaic
Operated by pressing the D. Effect button to toggle this function on and OFF.
6-9-3 Multi-screen
Number of screens 4 (2 × 2), 9 (3 × 3), 16 (4 × 4)
Operation mode manual, fast (every 4 frames), normal (every 6 frames), slow (every 8 frames)
6-9-4 Card mix No
6-9-5 Relationship between digital features and operaion mode
Folder No. File numbers File contents
100 0001 0002 0003 ・・・・ 0099 0100 Sample images provided at the factory
101 0101 0102 0103 ・・・・ 0199 0200
102 0201 0202 0203 ・・・・ 0299 0300
・・・
198 9801 9802 9803 ・・・・ 9899 9900
200 0001 0002 0003 ・・・・ 0099 0100
・・・
998 9801 9802 9803 ・・・・ 9899 9900
Image recording area
VCR/tape VCR/card (MC model only)
Fader ×Effects ×Multi-screen ×Card mix function (MC mode only) × ×
Sorce Record mode Images recorded to a card
Progressive animated imagePhoto recorded on tape with ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
NTSC/PAL model Progressive frame image
NTSC model Simple viewer frameNormal animated image
PAL model Field image
NTSC model Simple viewer frameDV input
PAL model Field image
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-12
6-10 Other functions
6-10-1 Editing mechanism Used for recording pauses and stops. Also possible when the power is turned off. This function
is not effective, when the cassette is removed.
6-10-2 Automatic stop mechanism Activates after approx. 5 min. of continuous forward still image playback or approx. 2 min. of
continuous reverse still image playback, when the condensation warning appears. when the end
or beginning of a tape is reached.
6-10-3 Automatic power off mechanism Operates when recording pause continues for approx. 5 min., and when the battery voltage
drops below the specified value.
6-10-4 Time code Automatic writing during recording. 0:00:00:00 - 7:59:59:29 (hour:minute:second:frame).
6-10-5 Photo search Used to search for photos recorded in the Photo mode.
Forward/reverse photo search (operate the , keys after selecting Photo Search with the
Search Select key of the remote control).
Setting is possible for up to +/−10 numbers from the current position.
6-10-6 Date search This function is used to specify the parts of dates that differ when recordings were made on
multiple dates.
Forward/reverse date search (operate the , keys after selecting Date Search with the
Search Select key of the remote control).
Setting is possible for up to +/−10 numbers from the current position.
6-10-7 World clock display After the reference city (the city for which the clock time has been set) has been set, the date and
time of the selected city will automatically be changed to the local date and time, and recorded
on the photo when a photo is taken.
6-10-8 Speaker Built-in. With volume adjustment.
6-10-9 Battery charge function None.
7 Terminals
7-1 DV terminal Special 4-pin connector (IEEE 1394 compatible), both input and output.
7-2 S-video terminal 4-pin mini DIN, both input and output (using Docking Unit DU-300).
7-3 Video/audio terminal φ 3.5mm, 4-pole pin jack (yellow), both input and output.
7-4 External microphone input terminal φ 3.5mm stereo mini jack (using Docking Unit DU-300).
7-5 Headphone terminal φ 3.5mm stereo mini jack (using Docking Unit DU-300).
7-6 Edit terminal φ 2.5mm mini-mini jack, LANC compatible (using Docking Unit DU-300).
7-7 Multi-media card connection terminal Special multi-pin jack (MC model only).
7-8 Battery terminal Special 4-pin jack.
8 Power supply
8-1 Input power supply 7.4VDC (battery pack), 7.2VDC (using the CA-410, CB-400).
8-2 Power consumption
Recording (Autofocus) Approx. 4.4 W (CVF), approx. 5.4 W (LCD monitor)10 Size (width × height × depth)
9 Size (W × H × D) Approx. 48 × 106 × 86 mm (approx. 1-7/8 × 4-4/8 × 3-3/8 in.) (excluding small protuberrances)
10 Mass (weight)
10-1 Weight of main unit Approx. 13 3/4 oz (390 g)
10-2 Total weight Approx. 1lb 5/8 oz (470 g)
(Including BP-406, DVM-E30, lens cap, button type lithium battery, grip belt and SDC-8M (for
MC model only))
12 Environmental conditions
12-1 Performance guarantee conditions 0°C ~ 40°C 85% (relative humidity)
12-2 Operation guarantee conditions −5°C ~ 45°C 65% (relative humidity)
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-13
4. System Charts
Fig. 1-2
VL-10Li Battery Video Light
BP-900 Series Lithium-ion Battery Pack
CH-910 Dual Battery Charger/Holder
BP-900 Series Lithium-ion Battery Pack
WL-D75/WL-D76 Wireless Controller
MiniDVVideo Cassette
SD Memory Card*orMultiMediaCard*
Card Reader*
CB-400Car Battery Adapter
BP-406, BP-412 and BP-422Battery Packs
DC-400 DC Coupler
CA-400 Compact Power Adapter
TV
VCR
SC-1000 Soft Carrying Case
S-150 S-video Cable
DU-300 Docking Unit
STV-250N Stereo Video Cable
Digital Device
Personal ComputerSC-A50 Soft Carrying Case
CV-150F DV Cable
SA-1 Adapter Bracket
Stereo Microphone (commercially available)
DU-300 Docking Unit
ZR-1000 Zoom Remote Controller
DU-300 Docking Unit
PC Card Adapter*
FD Adapter*
* ELURA20 MC only
CA-910 Compact Power Adapter
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-14
MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS
Camera mode
OFF
Zoom display
(appears for approx. 4 sec.
after zoom operation)Optical zoom W T
40× digital zoom W T
Zoom stopped W T
Zooming to Tele W T
Zooming to Wide W T
Hand jitter compensation displayHand jitter compensation ON
Hand jitter compensation OFF No display
Recording mode displaySD mode SP recording
LP recording
SDL mode SP recording E
LP recording E
Operation mode display Mirror mode (LCD)Recording
Recording pause
Cassette ejected
Stopped
+ Rec search
− Rec search
5. Viewfinder/ LCD Display Internal Display List
5-1 Camera Mode
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-15
MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS
Program AE mode displayFull auto mode
Auto mode
Sports mode
Portrait mode
Spotlight mode
Surf & snow mode
Low-light mode
Program AE mode menu
Tape counter displayTime code (no frame display)
When indeterminate
Zero set memory M
M
M
When indeterminate M
EXP lock displayMinimum exposure value
Standard exposure value
Maximum exposure value
AE No display
Timer display
Remaining tape display
Tape end
When indeterminate
Tape warning display (blink)
Other No display
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-16
MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS
Focus mode displayAF off
AF on No display
Selftimer displayTimer standby
Timer operating
Other No display
Battery level Approx. 100% Approx. 75% Approx. 50% Approx. 25%
Approx. 0% warning display (blink)
With power supply adapter mounted No display
Shutter speed display1/60 sec.
1/100 sec.
1/250 sec.
1/500 sec.
1/1000 sec.
1/2000 sec.
Auto No display
Button type lithium battery low level
warning display
Remote control cord displayWhen cord setting 1 is selected
When cord setting 2 is selected
Remote control receptor OFF
White balance displayWhen set Blinks in WB setting or NG.
Indoor preset Lights up continuously after WB setting.
Outdoor preset
Auto No display
Condensation warning display (blinks) Blinks in red.
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-17
MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS
Headphone volume adjustment display
Volume OFFOFF
Card mix display (MC model only)
Digital feature displayWhen auto fade is selected
When wipe is selected
When scroll is selected
When art is selected
When black & white is selected
When sepia is selected
When mosaic is selected
When multi-screen is selected
When feature off is selected No display
Window cut displayWindow cut ON No display
Window cut OFF OFF External microphone connected.
Date/time display
When date and time are not set.
Audio mode displayWhen 16 bits is selected
When 12 bits is selected
16:9 mode displayWhen the 16:9 mode is selected
Other No display
Half-way press lock displayAF/AE operation (blinks)
AF/AE locked (light green)
Focus mode displayNomal recording No display
Frame movie selected
Photo mode selected
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-18
MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS
VCR Mode
OFF
Audio output displayWhen 12-bit stereo 1 is selected
When 12-bit stereo 2 is selected
When 12-bit mix 1:1 is selected
12-bit mix variable is selected
16-bit No display
Audio mix ratio displayWhen ST-1:ST-2=1:0
When ST-1:ST-2=1:1
When ST-1:ST-2=0:1
Record mode displaySD mode SP recording
LP recording
SDL mode SP recording E
LP recording E
Operation mode displayRecording
Pause
When the cassette is ejected
When stopped
Play
Fast forward
Rewind
No tape
Fast forward play
2× speed play
1× speed play
Forward slow play
(Forward slow play)
5-2 VCR Mode
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-19
MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS
Forward frame play
Forward still play
Reverse still play
Reverse frame play
Reverse slow play
(Reverse slow play)
Reverse 1× speed play
Reverse 2× speed play
Rewind play
Forward edit search
Reverse edit search
Forward date/photo search
Reverse date/photo search
FF return
REW return
AV insert pause
AV insert record
Audio dubbing pause
Audio dubbing
Tape counterTime code display
When no setting
Zero set memory Same as in Camera mode
Remaining tape display Same as in Camera mode.
Audio dubbing/insert or search displayWhen AV insert is selected
When dubbing is selected
Date search
Freeze frame photo search
Other than search No display
Battery level display Same as in camera mode.
Remote control display Same as in camera mode.
Battery warning display Same as in camera mode.
Condensation warning display Same as in camera mode.
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-20
MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS
Speaker volume adjustment display
Volume OFFOFF
Headphone volume adjustment display Same as in Camera mode.
Data code display
Date & time setting
Dat
e an
d tim
e se
tting
Data code settingCamera dataDate and time Date and time & camera data
Time setting
Date setting
Camera dataAperture value display The aperture value for this product is
F1.6 and more.
Aperture fully closed This product does not have a fully closed
When no setting aperture function.
Shutter speed display The shutter speeds for this product are
1/30 sec., 1/60-1/2,000 sec.
When no setting
Time displayTime setting selected
When no setting
Time & time setting selected
When no setting
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-21
MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS
Day & time setting selected
When no setting
Wind cut display Same as in Camera mode.
Audio data displayWhen the audio dubbing/audio
input terminal selected
When the audio dubbing/microphone
input terminal is selected
Audio mode display Same as in Camera mode.
16:9 mode Same as in Camera mode.
DV inputDV input DV IN
Other No display
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-22
MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS
Card recording mode
012345678910
100 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11121314151617181920212223
M
Zoom/exposure compensation display Same as in Camera mode.
Hand jitter compensation display Same as in Camera mode.
Card image quality display
Program AE mode display Same as in Camera mode.
Card access display
Card remaining capacity displayNo card (blinks red)
frames is 9999 or more (green)
When the number of recordable
frames is 99 (green)
When the number of recordable
frames is 5 (yellow)
When the number of recordable
frames is zero (0) (red)
EXP lock display Same as in Camera mode.
Focus mode display Same as in Camera mode.
Selftimer display Same as in Camera mode.
Battery level display Same as in Camera mode.
5-3 Card Recording Mode (MC Model Only)
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-23
MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS
Shutter speed display
Auto mode selected
Button type lithium battery low level Same as in Camera mode.
warning display
Remote control code display Same as in Camera mode.
White balance display Same as in Camera mode.
Battery low level warning display Same as in Camera mode.
Condensation warning display Same as in Camera mode.
Date display Same as in Camera mode.
(Date & time only)
Photo button partially pressed Same as in Camera mode.
lock display
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-24
MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS
Card review screen
Card review mode display
Card record image display Same as the card record image display in
Card record mode.
Card access displayWriting to card Red display, sequential display.
Reading from carad Green display, sequential display.
Card remaining capacity displayNo card
Checking card level
No remaining capacity
99 frames remaining
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-25
MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS
Image size display Dot (horizontal)
Image protect Image protect set/cancel
Image delete mode Shift to image delete screen
Return Exit card review mode
Image protect set/cancel
Image delete screen
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-26
MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS
Card Play Mode
M
Print mark display
Protect display
DCF file name displayDirectory number 100, file number 0001
Directory number 998, file number 9900
Card access displayWriting to card
Red display Sequential display
Reading from card
Green display Sequential display
5-4 Card Play Mode (MC Model only)
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-27
MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS
Image number displayNo card
Checking number of cards recorded
Zero (0) card recorded
9th of 99 cards recorded
99th of 99 cards recorded
9900th of 9900 cards recorded
Image size Dot (Horizontal) × (Vertical)
Data display Same as in VCR mode
(Date & time only)
Slide show
M
Slide show operation guide displayslide show in progress
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-28
5-5 Menu Displays
Menu displays include Camera mode, VCR mode, Card recording mode and Card play mode.
Camera Mode
MAIN MENU ITEM SUB–MENU ITEM SETTING ITEM DEFAULT BACKUP
D. EFFECT D. EFFECT OFF OFF Lithium battery
FADER
EFFECT
MULTI-S
FADER FADE-T FADE-T Lithium battery
WIPE
SCROLL
EFFECT ART ART Lithium battery
BLK & WHT
SEPIA
MOSAIC
M. S. SPEED MANUAL MODERATE Lithium battery
FAST
MODERATE
SLOW
M. S. SPLIT 4 4 Lithium battery
9
16
RETURN
CARD MIX Shift the Card Mix Screen Displays
CAMERA SET UP SHUTTER AUTO AUTO Lithium battery
1/60
1/100
1/250
1/500
1/1000
1/2000
DIGITAL ZOOM ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
IMAGE S. ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
16:9 ON OFF Lithium battery
OFF
WHIT BAL AUTO AUTO Lithium battery
SET
INDOOR
OUTDOOR
RETURN
VCR SET UP REC MODE SP SP Lithium battery
LP
E SP
E LP
WIND SCREEN ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
AUDIO MODE *2 16 bit 12 bit Lithium battery
12 bit
RETURN
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-29
*1 : TALLY LAMP, BEEP, BRIGHTNESS, MIRROR and D/T DISPLAY data are displayed on the Menu screen only.
*2 : On other screens, they are displayed for 4 seconds after Power ON and Menu Exit.
D/TIME SEL is displayed only when D/T DISPLAY is OFF. WL REMOTE “OFF ( )” is always displayed.
MAIN MENU ITEM SUB–MENU ITEM SETTING ITEM DEFAULT BACKUP
DISP. SET TP BRIGHTNESS *1 Lithium battery
MIRROR *1 ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
TV SCREEN ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
D/T DISPLAY *1 ON OFF Lithium battery
OFF
RETURN
SYSTEM WL REMOTE *2 Lithium battery
OFF
TALLY LAMP *1 ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
BEEP *1 ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
T. ZONE/DST *2 LONDON N.Y. Lithium battery
LONDON
PARIS
PARIS
· · · · · ·
CAIRO
MOSCOW
DUBAI
KARACHI
DACCA
BANGKOK
H. KONG
TOKYO
SYDNEY
SOLOMON
WELLGTN
SAMOA
HONOLU.
ANCHOR
L.A.
DENVER
CHICAGO
N.Y.
CARACAS
RIO
FERNEN.
· · · · · ·
AZORES
AZORES
D/TIME SEL *2 JAN. 1,2001 JAN. 1,2001 Lithium battery
12:00 AM 12:00 AM
DEC.31,2001
11:59 PM
RETURN
RETURN
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-30
VCR Mode
MAIN MENU ITEM SUB–MENU ITEM SETTING ITEM DEFAULT BACKUP
D. EFFECT D. EFFECT OFF OFF Lithium battery
EFFECT
MULTI-S
FADER FADE-T FADE-T Lithium battery
WIPE
SCROLL
MOSAIC
EFFECT ART ART Lithium battery
BLK & WHT
SEPIA
MOSAIC
M. S. SPEED MANUAL MODERATE Lithium battery
FAST
MODERATE
SLOW
M. S. SPLIT 4 4 Lithium battery
9
16
RETURN
VCR SET UP REC MODE SP SP Lithium battery
LP
E SP
E LP
OUTPUT CH*1 L/R L/R Lithium battery
L/L
R/R
AUDIO DUB AUDIO IN AUDIO IN Lithium battery
MIC. IN
WIND SCREEN ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
AUDIO MODE 16 bit 12 bit Lithium battery
12 bit
RETURN
CARD SET UP QUALITY FINE FINE Lithium battery
STANDARD
IMAGE NOS. *1 RESET CONTINUOUS Lithium battery
CONTINUOUS
SHTR SOUND ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
RETURN
CARD OPER. COPY [ ] ] CANCEL CANCEL -----
EXECUTE
RETURN
DISP. SET UP BRIGHTNESS *1 Lithium battery
DISPLAY ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
6 SEC. DATE *1 ON OFF Lithium battery
OFF
DATA CODE *2 DATE/TIME DATE/TIME
CAMERA DATA Lithium battery
CAM & D/T
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-31
*1 : BRIGHTNESS, 6 SEC. DATE, OUTPUT CH and BEEP data are displayed on the Menu screen only.
*2 : On other screens, DATA CODE is displayed only when it is turned on.
MAIN MENU ITEM SUB–MENU ITEM SETTING ITEM DEFAULT BACKUP
DISP. SET UP D/TIME SEL *2 DATE DATE & TIME Lithium battery
TIME
DATE & TIME
RETURN
SYSTEM WL. REMOTE Lithium battery
OFF
TALLY LAMP ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
BEEP *1 ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
REUTRN
RETURN
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-32
Camera Recording Mode (Card/Camera Mode) (MC model only)
MAIN MENU ITEM SUB–MENU ITEM SETTING ITEM DEFAULT BACKUP
D. EFFECTS D. EFFECT OFF OFF Lithium battery
EFFECT
MULTI-S
EFFECT ART ART Lithium battery
BLK & WHT
SEPIA
MOSAIC
M. S. SPEED MANUAL MODERATE Lithium battery
FAST
MODERATE
SLOW
M. S. SPLIT 4 4 Lithium battery
9
16
RETURN
CAM. SET UP SHUTTER AUTO AUTO Lithium battery
1/60
1/100
1/250
1/500
1/1000
1/2000
D. ZOOM ON OFF Lithium battery
OFF
IMAGE S. ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
WHIT BAL AUTO AUTO Lithium battery
SET
INDOOR
OUTDOOR
RETURN
CARD SET UP QUALITY FINE FINE Lithium battery
STANDARD
FILE NOS. *1 RESET CONTINUOUS Lithium battery
CONTINUOUS
SHTR SOUND *1 ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
RETURN
DISP. SET UP BRIGHTNESS *1 Lithium battery
MIRROR *1 ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
TV SCREEN ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
D/T DISPLAY *1 ON OFF Lithium battery
OFF
RETURN
SYSTEM WL REMOTE *2 Lithium battery
OFF
BEEP *1 ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-33
*1 : BEEP, BRIGHTNESS, MIRROR, D/T DISPLAY, FILE NOS., and SHTR SOUND data are displayed on the Menu
screen only.
*2 : On other screens, they are displayed for 4 seconds after Power ON and Menu Exit.
D/TIME SEL is displayed only when D/T DISPLAY is OFF. WL REMOTE “OFF( )” is always displayed.
MAIN MENU ITEM SUB–MENU ITEM SETTING ITEM DEFAULT BACKUP
SYSTEM T. ZONE/DST *2 LONDON N.Y. Lithium battery
LONDON
PARIS
PARIS
· · · · · ·
CAIRO
MOSCOW
DUBAI
KARACHI
DACCA
BANGKOK
H.KONG
TOKYO
SYDNEY
SOLOMON
WELLGTN
SAMOA
HONOLU.
ANCHOR
L.A.
DENVER
CHICAGO
N.Y.
CARACAS
RIO
FERNEN.
· · · · · ·
AZORES
AZORES
D/TIME SEL *2 JAN. 1, 2001 JAN. 1, 2001 Lithium battery
12:00 AM 12:00 AM
DEC.31,2001
11:59 PM
RETURN
RETURN
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-34
Card Play Mode (Card/VCR Modes) (MC Model Only)
*1 : BRIGHTNESS, OUTPUT CH and BEEP data are displayed on the menu screen only.
*2 : On other screens, DATA CODE is displayed only when it is turned on.
MAIN MENU ITEM SUB–MENU ITEM SETTING ITEM DEFAULT BACKUP
CARD SET UP COPY [ ] CANCEL CANCEL -----
(SINGLE DISPLAY) EXECUTE
PRINT MARK Shift to Delete All Print Marks
IMAGE ERASE CANCEL CANCEL -----
SINGLE
ALL
FORMAT CANCEL CANCEL -----
EXECUTE
RETURN
CARD SET UP PROTECT Shift to Image Protect Mode.
(INDEX DISPLAY) PRINT MARK Shift to Print Mark Mode.
RETURN
VCR SET UP REC MODE SP SP Lithium battery
LP
RETURN
DISP. SET UP BRIGHTNESS *1 Lithium battery
DISPLAY ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
D/TIME SEL *2 DATE DATE & TIME Lithium battery
TIME
DATE & TIME
RETURN
SYSTEM WL REMOTE Lithium battery
OFF
TALLY LAMP ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
BEEP *1 ON ON Lithium battery
OFF
RETURN
RETURN
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-35
5-6 Card Mix Screen Displays
MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS
Card mix selection screen
Mix key setting screen
Mix level setting screen
Slide show screen
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-36
MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS
Index screen
Image protect screen
Print mark screen
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-37
MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS
Copy screenCopy ( ) selection screen
Copy ( ) execute screen
Copy ( ) selection screen
Copy ( ) execute screen
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-38
MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS
Image delete screenImage delete selection screen
One image deletion
Deletion in progress warning
All images deletion
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-39
MENU INDICATION NORTH AMERICA MODEL REMARKS
Format screen
Format confirmation screen
Format execution screen
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-40
5-7 Warning Display
COPYRIGHT PROTECTED PLAYBACK IS RESTRICTED· Displayed when a copyright protected tape is played back.
COPYRIGHT PROTECTED DUBBING RESTRICTED· Displayed when copyright data is detected during DV input. Also displayed when signals output from a TV set or vide are
disrupted ruing analog line input.
SET THE TIME ZONE, DATE AND TIME· Displayed when the power is turned on when the time zone, date and time have not been set.
REMOVE THE CASSETTE· Displayed if a cassette is loaded when a mechanical error or condensation is detected.
CHECK THE DV INPUT· Displayed when REC is pressed in a mode in which recording is possible but either DV input is not connected or, if connected
is not recognized for some reason.
CHANGE THE BATTERY PACK· Displayed when the battery is exhausted.
CONDENSATION HAS BEEN DETECTED· Displayed when condensation is detected (if cassette is loaded, this message will be followed by “REMOVE THE CASSETTE”).
THE TAPE IS SET FOR ERASURE PREVENTION· Displayed in the VCR mode when REC is pressed in a mode in which recording is possible but the cassette is set for erase
protection.
In the Camera mode, this message is displayed when the power is turned on, when the START/STOP button is pressed and when
a cassette is loaded.
TAPE END· Displayed when a key [FF, PLAY, etc.] that forwards the tape is pressed at the tape end or in a mode that can forward the tape
during detection.
CHECK THE CASSETTE [REC MODE]· Displayed when the Audio Dubbing or the AV insert button is pressed in a section recorded in LP/ESP/ELP, or when the LP/
ESP/ELP modes are detected during audio dubbing or AV insert.
CHECK THE CASSETTE [AUDIO MODE]· Displayed when the Audio Dubbing button is pressed in a section with 16-bit or 4-ch simultaneous recording. Also displayed
when the 16-bit/4-ch simultaneous recording mode is detected during audio dubbing.
CHECK THE CASSETTE [BLANK]· Displayed when an unrecorded section is detected during audio dubbing or AV insert.
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-41
HEADS DIRTY, USE CLEANING CASSETTE· Displayed when the head is clogged.
CARD ERROR· Displayed when recording is not possible because of a card error. (MC model only).
CARD FULL· Displayed when there is no available space on a card. (MC model only).
NAMING ERROR· Displayed when the file numbers or directory numbers have reached he maximum. (MC model only).
UNIDENTIFIABLE IMAGE· Displayed when an attempt is made to playback an image in a format that cannot be played back, a noncompatible JPEG image
or an image with damaged data. (MC model only).
PRINT MARK ERROR· Displayed when there are too many (51 or more) print marks or the mark file cannot be edited. (MC model only).
NO CARD· Displayed when there is no card in the body socket. (MC model only).
NO IMAGES· Displayed when there are no images on a card to play back. (MC model only).
THE CARAD IS SET FOR ERASURE PREVENTION· Displayed when an attempt is made to write to a SD card (VCR mode, card record mode) that is erase protected. (MC model
only).
** When a problem occurs, these warnings are displayed for approx. 4 sec. In the center of the screen.
** The only operation possible while a warning is being displayed is to change the mode, which causes the warning to disappear.
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-42
6. Data Backup
6-1 Main Power Supply Backup
The condensation timer is backed up only by the main power supply.
6-2 Backup by the Main Power Supply or Backup Power Supply (Button Type Lithium Primary Battery)
Items other than the menu items backed up by the main power supply or backup power supply(button type lithium primary battery).
Item Default Remarks
Digital zoom position Optical Tele
WB date(SET) - - - - -
Date/time setting(auto date) 2001.1.1 12:00AM
Menu cursor position Uppermost position
Time code - - - - -
Mix balance Center
Headphone volume Center
Speaker volume Center
Mechanical error - - - - - Reset by removing the main power supply
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-43
6-3 Backup Conditions Using Switch Operation
6-3-1 Turning OFF the Power Supply
When the camera mode is “Program AE”.
In the Full Auto mode , turn on the camera power and then follow the procedure in 6-3-3 Setting the Full Auto mode.
* CAM* Camera mode only *CD : Card Record mode only (MC model only)
* Independent : The Card/camera mode, Camera mode and VCR mode are backed up independently.
* SD : SP/LO mode only.
Still image selection for card mix recording (card mix standby) is not backed up when the power is turned OFF.
Item Power switch OFF/VCR
Camera mode, Card record mode
Program AE modes Backup
Manual focus ON/OFF Backup
EXP lock ON/OFF Reset (to OFF)
DE, DF ON/OFF Reset (to OFF)
Headphone volume *CAM Backup
Selftimer ON/OFF Reset (to OFF)
On-screen ON/OFF Backup
Zero set memory counter value *CAM Backup
Camera, Card recording menu item setting
Digital effect selection Backup *Independent
Fader *CAM Backup *Independent
Effect Backup *independent
Multi-screen speed Backup *Independent
Multi-screen number Backup *Independent
Card mix key selection *CAM (MC model only) Backup
Card mix level *CAM (MC model only) Backup
Shutter speed setting Backup
Digital zoom setting Backup
Hand jitter compensation ON/OFF Backup
16:9 ON/OFF *CAM Backup
White balance setting Backup
Remote control code setting Backup
TALLY lamp *CAM Backup
Record mode setting *CAM Backup
Warning buzzer ON/OFF Backup
Wind cut ON/OFF Backup
Audio mode setting *CAM *SD Backup
LCD Brightness adjustment Backup
Mirror photo setting Backup
On-screen ON/OFF Backup
Day/time display Backup
Time zone/daylight saving time setting Backup
Date/time setting Backup
Image quality *CD Backup
Number reset *CD Backup
Shutter sound *CD Backup
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-44
6-3-2 Other Power Switch Positions
Item Power switch OFF
VCR mode
Headphone volume Backup
Speaker volume Backup
On-screen ON/OFF Reset (to OFF)
Zero set memory counter value Backup
Data code display ON/OFF Reset (to OFF)
Audio 12-bit output selection Reset (to stereo 1)
Mix balance setting Backup
Search selection photo search/date search Reset (to photo search)
VCR menu item setting
Digital effect selection Backup *Independent
Fader *CAM Backup Independent
Effect Backup *Independent
Multi-screen speed Backup *Independent
Multi-screen number Backup *Independent
Remote control code setting Backup
Record mode setting Backup
Data code setting Backup
Date/time select setting Backup
LCD Brightness adjustment Backup
Text display during playback ON/OFF Backup
Auto date/time display ON/OFF Backup
Bilingual setting Reset (to main + sub)
Audio dubbing input setting Backup
Wind cut ON/OFF Backup
Line in audio mode setting Backup
Warning buzzer ON/OFF Backup
Image quality (MC model only) Backup
Number reset (MC model only) Backup
Card play mode (MC model only)
On-screen ON/OFF Reset (to OFF)
Data code display ON/OFF Reset (to OFF)
Card play mode menu item setting (MC model only)
Remote control code setting Backup
Record mode setting Backup
Data code setting Backup
Date/time selection Backup
LCD Brightness adjustment Backup
Text display during playback Backup
Date auto display Backup
Warning buzzer Backup
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-45
6-3-3 Switching the Camera Mode/Switching the Program AE Mode
When the / switch is switched from (Program AE) to (Full Auto), and when the / switch is at , the various
items are backed up if switched to other program AE mode.
* CAM * Camera mode only *CD : Card Record mode only (MC model only)
* Independent:The Card/camera mode, Camera mode and VCR mode are backed up independently.
• Card mix recording of still image selection(card mix standby)is not backed up in either normal or progressive.
• Backup for timer power OFF for a 5-minute record pause and for LANC power OFF is the same as for when the power switch
is turned OFF.
Item Full Auto Switch the Program AE mode
Camera mode, Card recording mode (MC model only)
Program AE mode type Reset (to Auto) – – – – –
Autofocus ON/OFF Reset (to ON) Backup
EXP lock ON/OFF Reset (to OFF) Reset (to OFF)
DE, DF ON/OFF Reset (to OFF) Backup
Headphone volume Backup Backup
Selftimer ON/OFF Backup Backup
On-screen ON/OFF Backup Backup
Zero set memory counter value *CAM Backup Backup
Camera mode, Card recording mode (MC model only) menu item setting
Digital effect selection Backup *Independent Backup *Independent
Fader *CAM Backup *Independent Backup *Independent
Effect Backup *Independent Backup *Independent
Multi-screen speed Backup *Independent Backup *Independent
Multi-screen number Backup 'Independent Backup *Independent
Card mix selection *CAM (MC model only) Backup Backup
Card mix level *CAM (MC model only) Backup Backup
Card mix record image selection *CAM Reset Backup
(MC model only) (card mix standby)
Shutter speed Reset (to Auto) Reset (to Auto)
Digital zoom ON/OFF Backup Backup
Hand jitter compensation Reset (to ON) Backup
16:9 *CAM Reset (to OFF) Backup
White balance Reset (to Auto) Backup
Remote control code Backup Backup
Tally lamp ON/OFF *CAM Backup Backup
Record mode *CAM Backup Backup
Warning buzzer Backup Backup
Wind cut Backup Backup
Audio mode *CAM Backup Backup
LCD Brightness adjustment Backup Backup
Mirror photo setting Backup Backup
On-screen ON/OFF Backup Backup
Day/time display Backup Backup
Time zone/daylight saving time Backup Backup
Date/time setting Backup Backup
Image quality *CD (MC model only) Backup Backup
Image size *CD (MC model only) Backup Backup
Number reset *CD (MC model only) Backup Backup
Shutter sound *CD (MC model only) Backup Backup
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-46
7. Others
7-1 Green Mode
Green Mode Default Status
• Focus --------------------------------------- Auto
• Exposure ---------------------------------- Auto
• White balance ---------------------------- Auto
• DE, DF ------------------------------------ OFF
• Hand jitter compensation --------------- ON
• Shutter ------------------------------------- Auto
• 16:9 ---------------------------------------- OFF
Other than the above, all statuses will remain the same even at the Green mode position.
Keys that are Ineffective in the Green Mode.
• Focus (Auto/Manual) button (compulsory Auto)
• Exposure (Auto/Lock) button (compulsory Auto)
• Multi-dial
• Digital effect (ON/OFF) button (compulsory OFF)
Relationship between the Program AE Mode and the Various Photo Functions
7-2 On-Screen
• On-screen can be turned on and OFF using LANC, infrared remote control or the menu.
• Text on line out will be white during on-screen (LCD panel and CVF text will be in color).
• The display defaults are ON in the Camera mode and OFF in the VCR mode.
7-3 Headphone (with Docking Unit DU-300 Connected), Speaker
• The speaker is OFF in the Camera mode.
• The speaker is ON during normal VCR mode playback and the volume can be adjusted with the Multi-dial.
• Headphone volume can be adjusted with the Multi-dial only when Headphone has been mounted.
• The speaker is turned OFF when Headphone is selected from the menu.
Item
Autofocus ON/OFF Compulsory ON
Shutter speed setting × × × × × ×
AE lock × × ×
Hand jitter compensation ON/OFF Compulsory ON
White balance setting Compulsory Auto
Wind cut ON/OFF
Digital zoom ON/OFF
16:9 ON/OFF Compulsory OFF
Digital fader ON/OFF ×
Digital effect ON/OFF ×
Multi-screen ×
Photo recording (tape recording)
Progressive photo recording
Card mix (MC model only) ×
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-47
7-4 Battery Level display, Warning Displays and (Low-Power) Power Shutoff
Battery Level Display
• When a battery is used, the 5-step battery level display before the low power warning is displayed (100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, 0%
(approx.)) will be reset when the power is turned OFF. In other words, if the voltage is restored while the power is OFF, the
battery level display will show an increase when the power is again turned ON. Once the low-power display has appeared,
however, the low-power warning will not be reset, even if the voltage is restored.
• When the AC adapter is used, there is no battery level display. If the voltage should drop drastically below the warning level
warning, however, the battery level warning will appear. Also, the battery level warning will turn OFF when the battery voltage
rises above the power-OFF warning level.
7-5 System Data Display
* The time code display is “-: -: -: -:” for unrecorded sections and when there is no tape.
* CGMS: not output to LINE OUT and CVF (panel) when copying is prohibited.
7-6 Data Code display
Data code can be used to turn displays ON and OFF independently (without regard to other on-screen text displays.)
7-7 MP Tape Capability
LP as well as ESP and ELP recording is not possible with MP tape. Even if LP, ESP or ELP is selected from menu, the SP mode will
always be set when a tape is loaded. LP playback is possible with tapes recorded in the LP mode.
7-8 Warning Buzzer
The warning buzzer will sound melodically in the following cases.
REC PAUSE (*) includes audio dubbing and AV insert REC PAUSE.
* Peep = 4KHz; beep = 2KHz; boop 1KHz
Camera mode VCR mode
Camera screen Rec search DIF input Blue background PB (special playback)
Data code (date/time) × LANC appears × LANC appears × - - - ~ - - -
Data code (camera data) × × × F - - -, etc. × F - - -, etc.
Time code Body
Audio mode (12/16 bit) 4-sec. display × DIF ×
Wide/normal Setting display × DIF ×
CGMS (warning) ~ DIF ×
SP/LP Setting display Setting display Setting display
Mode Tone color
Power on Peep
When a cassette tape whose erase protection knob is set to Save is loaded (Camera mode) Peep, peep, peep
When the EJECT cover is left open (including power off) Peep, peep
When recording starts (Camera mode) Peep
During REC PAUSE (Camera mode) Peep, peep
Photo button partially pressed OK Peep, peep
Photo REC start Peep
When condensation is detected, when a camera error occurs, and 5 sec. Beep × 5
before the REC PAUSE (*) 5-min. timer ends
When the Setting button is operated while menu selection is not possible Boop
20 sec., 15 sec., and 10 sec. before the REC PAUSE (*) 5-min. timer ends Beep, beep, beep
Seiftimer (syncs with tally blinking) Peep, peep, 1-sec. interval × 8
Peep, 0.25-sec. interval × 8
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-48
7-9 Using Analog Line, DV Recording
(1) Set the power switch to [VCR].
The Power LED (green) will light and, if a cassette is loaded, standby status will be activated. The jack (DVAS-video, AV mini)
status will be output, and headphone jack (with Docking Unit DU-300 connected) and speaker will be output (higher priority in
headphone).
(2) Connect a cable from a recording source to the S-video jack* (video signal) and AV mini jack (audio signal), or to the AV mini jack
(video and audio signals), or to the DV jack; then turn on the recording source power supply.
If the recording source is connected to multiple jacks at the same time, the recording source is automatically selected in following
jack priority.
DV Jack> S-video Jack * > AV Jack * : (with Docking Unit DU-300 connected)
During playback (including special play), the playback image will have a higher priority.
(3) On the remote control, press [REC STANDBY].
Recording pause status will be activated. In the case of analog line input, the S-video jack and AV mini jack will switch to input.
(4) To start recording, press [ / ] of the remote controller.
Recording of the video and audio from the jack selected in item (2) will start.
([ / ] toggles the record and record pause operations.)
(5) Press [] to stop recording.
Recording will stop.
The Table below Shows the Input and Output Status for Each Mode.
* There is no signal when there is no line input.
7-10 VIdeo ID1 Detection/Output Capability
(1) S1 signal output
When 16:9 images are output from the S-video jack in the Full (Squeeze) mode compressed to 4:3, an identification signal is output
to automatically return them to 16:9 images for wide monitors with S1 capability (when tape on which is recorded system data
related to the camera 16:9 mode or aspect ratio is played back.)
• NTSC → 16:9 full mode + 4:3 letterbox mode identification signal output
(2) Video ID1 output
When 16:9 images are output from the composite video jack in the Full (Squeeze) mode compressed to 4:3, an identification signal
is output to automatically return them to 16:9 images for wide monitors with Video ID1 capability (when tape on which is recorded
system data related to the camera 16:9 mode or aspect ratio is played back.)
(3) S1 signal and video ID1 detection with line input
When video ID1 and S1 signals superimposed over video signals from the composite video jack or S-video jack are detected, the
system data related to aspect ratio is recorded.
DV input signal present No DV input signal present
LCD/CVF DV jack S/AV jack LCD/CVF DV jack S/AV jack
PlaybackPlayback screen OUT OUT Playback screen OUT OUT
(including special playback)
No tape, STOP, FF, REW DV input screen IN OUT Blue background OUT OUT
REC PAUSE/PEG DV input screen IN OUT Line input screen * IN IN
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-49
7-11 Closed Caption Detection/Output
(1) Closed caption signal output
• When tape on which closed caption data are recorded is played back, the closed caption data is output superimposed over the
video signal.
• The caption data can be displayed on the screen if the monitor has a built-in closed caption decoder.
(2) Closed caption signal detection
• During analog or digital line input recording, the closed caption data in the input signal is detected and the closed caption data
is then recorded.
7-12 Audio Dubbing
7-12-1 Tape Usable for Audio Dubbing
Only tapes with 12-bit SP recording other than for dubbing 4-channel simultaneous recordings can be used. If an attempt is made
to use any other tape, the Stop mode will be activated.
If the LP mode, 16-bit mode, 4-ch simultaneous recordings, unrecorded or SDL (E SP / E LP mode) recordings are detected → Stop
(warning display).
7-12-2 Selecting an Audio Dubbing Signal Input Source
The audio dubbing input source is selected from the VCR menu.
Either of two items can be selected: Line (AV mini jack) or Mic. When Mic is selected, input will be from the external microphone
if one is connected; otherwise, input will be from the built-in microhone.
7-12-3 Audio Dubbing Operation
(1) In the VCR mode, position and pause the tape to be dubbed, then press the dubbing key of the remote control.
The dubbing mode will be activated (dubbing pause) and (dubbing pause) will appear on the LCD panel (CVF).
(2) Press the Pause key and input sound into the microphone.
Dubbing will start.
(3) Press the stop key to stop.
The dubbing mode will be canceled, the dubbing display will disappear and operation will stop.
• If the pause key is pressed instead of the stop key, the dubbing mode will not be canceled and status (1) (dubbing pause) will
return.
• Dubbing can also be canceled by pressing the dubbing key during dubbing pause.
• Also, if the Zero Set Memory key of the remote control is pressed at the tape position where dubbing is to be ended, operation
will automatically stop and dubbing will be canceled when that position is reached after operation (2).
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-50
7-13 AV Insert
In the AV insert mode, the audio, video and sub-code areas are overwritten, but not the ITI (Insert and Track Information) area.
7-13-1 Tape Usable for AV Insert
Only tape recorded in the SP mode can be used for AV insert. If an attempt is made to use any other tape, the Stop mode will be
activated.
If the LP mode, an unrecorded section or SDL mode is detected, operation will also stop (warning display).
7-13-2 AV Insert Operation
(1) In the VCR mode, position and pause the tape to be used for AV insert, then press the AV Insert key of the remote control.
The AV Insert mode will be activated (AV Insert Pause) and (AV Insert Pause) will appear on the LCD panel (CVF).
(2) Press the Pause key and input the video and audio.
AV insert will start. (AV Insert) will appear on the LCD panel (CVF).
(3) Press the Stop [] key to stop.
The AV Insert mode will be canceled, the AV Insert display will disappear and operation will stop.
• If the Pause [] key is pressed instead of the Stop key, the AV Insert mode will not be canceled and status (1) (AV Insert pause)
will return.
* AV Insert can also be canceled by pressing the AV Insert key of the remote control during AV Insert Pause.
* Also, if the Zero Set Memory key of the remote control is pressed at the tape position where AV insert is to be ended, operation will
automatically stop and AV insert will be canceled when that position is reached after operation (2).
7-14 Multi-Dial
VCR operation and various settings are performed in accordance with the body mode.
Dial Rotation
Pushing the Dial
Body mode Operational function Rotating the dial upward
Using the menu Item selection The cursor moves upward
MenuLCD Brightness adjustment Brightness adjustment The LCD screen becomes brighter
Card mix level adjustment Mix level adjustment The mix level range narrows
EXP lock EXP compensation The aperture opens
Manual focus Focus adjustment Focus shifts to close-up
VCR mode : Speaker volume adjustment The volume increases
Body mode Operational function Dial push
Photo pause Program AE,AE menu open/close Program AE mode selection
(selection confirmation)
Digital effect Digital effect mode selection switch Digital effect mode is selected.
Menu Menu setting item switch An item is selected.
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-51
7-15 LCD Panel/CVF (Color ViewFinder)
LCD panel and CVF power supply status
7-15-1 Camera Mode/Camera Recording Mode
* : Panel display is restricted (but CVF and on-screen displays are normal) in the Mirror mode. Only the following codes are displayed
in the upper left corner.
• Camera mode: only Recording . Recording pause , Inject display
• Card recording mode: No card , Card & access indicator <<<<
(The Mirror mode is temporarily canceled during record search and various menu settings.)
7-15-2 VCR Mode/Card Play Mode
7-16 Memory Card System
7-16-1 Card Recording (Card Recording of Still Images)
a. Still Recording of Camera Images
(1) Set the Power switch to Cameran, and set the Photo mode switch to or .
The Power lamp will light (red) and recording status will be activated if a card has been loaded.
(2) Frame the subject in the center of the screen from the desired angle, then partially press the [Photo] key.
“ ” will blink white, focus and AE will be locked and, when the operation of the hand jitter compensation function has been
restricted, “ ” will light green.
(3) Frame the subject and fully press the [Photo] key. “ ” will go out and the image will be recorded on the card at the instant the key
is fully pressed. During the card recording, the red access display (“>>>>”) will blink ( > → >> → >>> → >>>> → > • • •) toward
the “Card mark ”. During this time, the image being recorded will stop (freeze) on the LCP panel (or CVF) so the result can be
checked. (In the mirror photo mode, “>>>>”will blink white toward the Card mark.)
b. Card Recording of VCR Images During Playback
(1) Tape is played back using normal playback. If the [Photo] button is partially pressed during tape playback, the card data will appear
on the screen and, at the same time, Play Pause will be activated. lf the [Photo] button is now fully pressed, the still image will be
recorded on the card. The above operation can also be performed during Play Pause.
LCD panel layout LCD panel power supply CVF power supply
Stored (panel surface side of body) OFF ON
Stored (outside panel surface) ON OFF
Mirror mode aborted
Open ON OFF
Mirror photo status ON ON
LCD panel layout LCD panel power supply CVF power supply
Stored (panel surface side of body) OFF ON
Stored (outside panel surface) ON OFF
Open ON OFF
Mirror photo status ON OFF
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-52
c. Card Recording of DV Input Images
(1) Set the Power switch to [VCR]. The Power lamp (green) will light and, if a cassette is loaded, standby status will be activated.
(2) Connect a cable from the recording source to the DV jack and turn on the source power supply.
(3) If the [Photo] button is pressed when there is no tape or the tape is in stop status, the card data will appear on the screen and, at the
same time, DV input will stop. If the [Photo] button is now fully pressed, the still image will be recorded on the card.
* When an image recorded in the 16:9 mode is recorded on a card, it will be recorded on the card in vertical format.
* Card recording of still image is not possible during analog line input (S-video jack, AV jack)
7-16-2 Copying [ ] / [ ]
Still image (Photo record) scenes recorded on tape are automatically searched and recorded sequentially on a card (VCR mode
copy [ ]). Still images recorded on a card can also be photo recorded sequentially as still images on tape (card play mode
copy [ ]).
a. Copy( )
Still image (Photo record) scenes recorded on tape are automatically searched and recorded sequentially on a card.
(1) Set the Power switch to [VCR].
(2) Use [FF] and [REW] keys to locate the desired start position on the tape. Move the current tape position forward of the still image
(Photo record) to be copied.
(3) Use the [Menun key to open the menu, select the “Card Execute” and “Card Execute” sub menu “Copy [ ]” and then press
the [Settings] key. Cancel/Execute will appear. To abort copying, select Cancel and press the [Settings] key.
To execute the copy, select “Execute” and press the [Settings] key.
(4) When Execute has been selected and set, the Copy Execute screen (tape data is displayed in the upper left corner and card data is
displayed in the lower right corner) will open and the copy operation will start.
During the copy operation, a still image search of the tape will be performed starting from the current tape position. The still
images discovered during the search are recorded as still images on the card. This operation will repeat until the end of the tape is
reached or the card becomes full. The copy operation can be halted at any time by pressing the Stop key [].
b. Copy ( )
Still image scenes recorded on card are automatically recorded in sequence as still images on tape.
(1) Set the Power switch to [Card play] mode.
(2) Use the [+] and [-] keys to display the desired image (the image where copying is to start). When copying from a card to tape,
copying will proceed sequentially from the currently displayed image to the last image.
(3) Use the [Menu] key to open the menu, select the “Card Execute menu” and press the [Settings] key.
From the “Card Execute” menu, select “Copy [ ]” and then press the [Settings] key to open the Copy Execute screen,
where “Cancel/Execute” will appear. To abort copying, select “Cancel” and press the [Settings] key.
To execute the copy, select “Execute” and press the [Settings] key.
(4) When Execute has been selected and set, the Copy Execute screen (card data is displayed in the upper left corner and tape data is
displayed in the lower right corner) will open and the copy operation will start. During the copy operation, the currently displayed
still image search will be photo copied to the tape and then the next image will be displayed. This operation will repeat sequentially
until the last image has been copied or the end of the tape has been reached. The copy operation can be halted at any time by
pressing the Stop key[].
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-53
7-16-3 Card Mix
(1) Set the Power switch to “Movie” and set the Photo mode switch to .
The Power lamp (red) will light and, if a cassette is loaded, recording pause status will be activated.
(2) Press the [Menu] key and select “ Card Mix” from the main menu.
(3) The Card Mix sub-menu will open and the still image to be recorded on the card will appear instantaneously.
Next, the card image and camera image will be mixed. The mix type, mix level and mix images can now be checked. lf the [Menu]
key is not pressed at this time to close the menu, it will not be possible to enter card mix standby status (standby status cannot be
entered unless an image has been recorded and can be played back).
When the Card [+] and [-] keys are pressed, the card still images will appear.
When Mix Type is selected and the [Settings] key is pressed, three setting items will appear: “Card chroma key”, “Card luminance
key” and “Camera chroma key”. Select the desired mix method from among these three.
Also, when “Mix Level” is selected and the [Settings] key is pressed, the slide bar [ ] will appear for setting the mix
level. When the desired mix level has been set, press the [Settings] key to establish the setting.
(4) When the [Menu] key is pressed to close the menu, the Card Mix Standby status will be activated.
(5) When the [Start/Stop] button is pressed, card mix moving images will be recorded to the cassette tape.
When the [Photo] button is pressed, card mix still images will be recorded on the cassette tape.
* Even if the above card mix settings have been made, the image selection settings and standby status will be canceled
by the following operations; therefore, it will be necessary to make the Image settings again.
• When the Power switch has been set to another mode.
• When the Photo Mode switch has been set to Green mode.
7-16-4 Card Playback
a. Normal Playback/Slide Show
(1) Set the Power switch to [Card play] mode. The Power lamp will light (green) and, if a card has been loaded and if there are images,
the last image will be displayed. If no images have been recorded, a blue background will be displayed and the warning “No
images” will be displayed for about 4 sec.
The Card [+] and [-] keys can be used to display the previous and next images. When the [+] key is pressed at the last image, the
first image will be displayed. When the [-] key is pressed at the first image, the last image will be displayed.
(2) When the [Slide Show] button is pressed a slide show will start from the currently displayed image. Each of the image will be
displayed for approx. 5 sec. and then the next image will appear. The slide show can be canceled by again pressing the [Slide
Show] button.
The [Slide Show] key is toggled on starting and ending the slide show operation.
* The last image is the image with the largest directory number and the highest image number. The first image is the
image with the smallest directory number and the smallest image number.
b. Index Screen
Six images can be displayed on one screen, making it easy to search images.
(1) Press the [Index] key to change to the Index screen. Press again to return to
the previous playback mode.
From the Index screen, the Multi-dial is used to select images (the mark
will appear on the left side of the image).
(2) A The images on the screen can be selected sequentially by operating the Multi-
dial. If the Multi-dial is again operated after the last (or first) image on the
screen has been selected, the top (or. the last) screen will be displayed auto-
matically.
Screens showing 6 images each can be selected by operating the Card [+] and [-] keys. Only one selected image can be displayed
normally by pressing the [Index] key.
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-54
7-16-5 Image Protecting Setting
It is possible to protect (erase protection) important images so they cannot be erased even if an attempt is made by mistake.
(1) Press the [Index] key to open the Index screen, and press the [Menu] key to open the Menu screen.
(2) From the “Card Execute” menu, select the “ Image Protect ” and press the [Settings] key to display the “Image Protect” screen
(one screen displays 6 images). The Multi-dial can be used to select images from the “Image Protect” screen in the same way as for
the Index screen described above. After the images have been selected, protection for the selected images can be toggled “ON/
OFF” by pressing the [Settings] key. The protect mark ( ) will be appended to identify the protected images.
7-16-6 Print Mark Setting
The print mark (DPOF mark) is a function that can be used to automatically select images for printing with a printer or by a lab.
(1) Select the “Card Execute” menu in the same way as in item (1) in image protection setting described above.
(2) From the “Card Execute” menu, select the “ Print Mark ” and press the [Settings] key to display the “Print Mark” screen (one
screen displays 6 images). The Multi-dial can be used to select images from the “Print Mark” screen in the same way as for the
Index screen described above After the images have been selected, the print mark for the selected images can be toggled “ON/OFF”
by pressing the [Settings] key. The protect mark ( ) will be appended to identify the protected images.
* Print marks can be appended to a maximum of 50 images. If an attempt is made to append the print mark to the 51st
image, a print mark error will occur and setting will not be possible.
7-16-7 Image Erase
The following method can be used to erase unwanted images.
There are two image erase methods. One method is used after card recording has ended. In the other method, only images selected
by using card review are erased while a card is still being used.
Image Erasure after Card Recording has Ended
(1) Set the Power switch to [Card play] mode. When the still images are displayed, press the [Menu] key to open the “Card play” menu
screenh and select the “Cart Executeh” sub-menu.
(2) On the “Card Execute” sub-menu, select “Image Erase”.
(3) When “Image Erase” is selected, “Cancel/Erase One Image/Erase All” will appear. Select the desired item and then press the
[Settings] key.
a) To abort image erase, select “Cancel” and press the [Settings] key.
b) To erase individual images after confirmation, select “Erase One Image” and then press the [Settings] key. When Erase One
Image is selected and set, the screen will change and the message “Erase This Image?” plus a “Yes” / ”No” box will appear. To
erase the displayed image, select “Yes” and then press the [Settings] key.
To erase a different image, use the Card [+] and [-] keys to display the image to be erased, select Yes and then press the [Settings]
key to execute the erasure. To end erasing, select No and then press the [Settings] key. The menu in upper hierarchy will return.
In the case of protected images, the Protect Mark ( ) will be displayed at the top center of the screen, “Yes” will be displayed
in purple and setting will be disabled. In order to erase a protected image, it is necessary to first return to the “Protect Setting
screen” described above
c) To erase all of the images, select “Erase All” and then press the [Settings] key and then press the Settings key. When Erase All
is selected and set, the screen will change and the message “Erase All Images?” plus a “Yes” / ”No” box will appear. To erase
all of the displayed images, select Yes and then press the [Settings] key. To abort erasing, select No and then press the [Settings]
key.
Even if an attempt is made to erase all images, protected images will not be erased.
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-55
7-16-8 Format
Format is executed for new cards, when the “Card Error” warning appears, and when all of the images and files on a card are to be
erased. Use the following method to execute Format.
(1) Select the “Card Execute” menu in the same way as in item (1) in image protection setting described above.
(2) From the “Card Execute” menu, select "Format" and then press the [Settings] key.
(3) “Cancel/Execute” box will appear. To execute formatting, select “Execute” and press the [Settings] key. To cancel formatting,
select the “Cancel” key and then press the [Settings] key.
(4) When Execute has been selected and executed, the message “Format This Card?” will appear together with a “Yes/No” box. To
continue with formatting, select “Yes” and then press the [Settings] key. To cancel formatting, select “Cancel” key and press the
[Settings] key.
* Use caution because the following images and files will be erased by formatting.
• Protected images
• Previously recorded card mix sample images
• Images and files from other equipment or PC
7-16-9 Card Review
When [– / ] key is pressed on the Card recording mode, the “Card still
image check” display will appear and the mode will be changed to the Card
Still Image Check mode. For the still images read out, the “Image Protect
” or “Delete One Image” operation is available.
To cancel the mode, select “Return” with the multi-dial.
The mode will return to ordinary mode after images are deleted.
* If the card contains no image or the card is an SD memory card pro-
tected, you can not move to the Card review mode.
7-16-10 Image Setting
If the multi-dial is pressed during card (single) playback, the mode will be changed to the Image setting mode and the “Image
Setting” display will appear. For the still images read out, the “Image Protect ”, “Print Mark Setting”, or “Delete One
Image” operation is available.
Image settings can be canceled by selecting “Return” on the multi-dial.
* If the card contains no image, you can not move to the Image setting mode.
* In the case of an SE memory card protected, the mode can be changed to the Image setting mode, but the operation
menu items above are displayed in purple and disabled.
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF PRODUCT
1-56
7-16-11 Forward Skip for Card Playback
If you press and hold the card “+” (or “–”) button during card playback (single
playback), you can quickly go to the desired card image.
On the card counter display of “display no./total count”, the display no. will be
changed while you press and hold the button, and the image when you release
the button will be read out and displayed
* If the display no. exceeds the total count during card feeding, the
display no. will restart from 1.
* If the display no. gets smaller than “1”, the display no. will restart re-
versely from total count.
Card Related Cautions for All Modes
* Cautions
• When the red “>>>>” mark (this mark is white “ ” in the Mirror Photo mode/Memory mode and in the Line Out screen) is
blinking facing toward the Card mark (>>>>), this means that the card is being written, so never remove the card, disconnect the
battery pack or AC power cord at this time. Such actions can damage the images being recording (marking readout and
playback impossible) or even damage all of the images already recorded on the card.
• When the green “<<<<” mark is blinking facing away from the Card mark ( ), data is being read from the card, so the card
should never be removed at this time.
• Always turn the Power switch to the “OFF” position before inserting or ejecting a card.
CHAPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
CONTENTS
1. P.C.B Functions -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-1
2. Power Supply Circuit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-3
2-1 Startup of Power Supply ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-3
2-2 Power Fuses ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-4
2-3 Power Supply Circuit ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-5
3. Signal Processing Circuit --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-6
3-1 Outline of Signal Processing Circuit ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-6
3-2 Camera, Card Signal Processing --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-7
3-3 Recorder Signal Processing ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-9
3-4 Audio Signal Flow -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-10
4. System Control, Servo ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-11
4-1 Outline of System Control, Servo ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-11
4-2 Major Functions of Each Microcomputer ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-12
4-3 Servo Control -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-12
4-4 Error Detection -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-13
4-4-1 Error Detecting Conditions ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-13
4-4-2 Processing after Error Detection ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-13
4-5 IC Terminal Functions ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-14
4-5-1 CAMERA MI-COM (IC1401) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-14
4-5-2 MAIN MI-COM (IC100) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-17
4-5-3 SUB MI-COM (IC203) --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-21
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-1
1. P.C.B Functions
(1) MAIN P.C.B.
System-Control Section
• IC100 MAIN MI-COM : Servo, Video, Audio Control, System Control
• IC101 RESET : MAIN MI-COM reset
• IC200 E3V REG&RESET : E3V regulator, MODE MI-COM reset
• IC201 EEPROM : EEPROM for recorder data
• IC202 LANC INTERFACE : LANC interface
• IC203 SUB MI-COM : Power Supply Control, Clock
Camera Section
• IC1101 DIC4 : Camera digital signal processing
• IC1102 SDRAM : Memory for DIC4
• IC1104,5 AND : AND gate for control signal
• IC1106 INVERTER : Inverter amplifier for clock
• IC1301 4.0V REGULATOR : 4.0V regulator
• IC1302,3 OPE AMP : Operational amplifier for IRIS control
• IC1304 MOTOR DRIVER : AF/PZ motor drive
• IC1401 CAMERA MI-COM : AE, AWB, AF, EIS, DE control
• IC1402 RESET : CAMERA MI-COM reset
• IC1403 EEPROM : EEPROM for camera data
• IC1404 EVR (D/A CONVERTER) : (EVR)D/A converter for camera adjustment
CVF Section
• IC1501 EVR (D/A CONVERTER) : D/A converter for EVR of EVF section
• IC1502 EVF DRIVER : EVF LCD (CVF) drive
• IC1503 SWITCH : EVF display character mixing switch
Video Section
• IC2000 VRP2 : Recording/Playback head amplifier
• IC2100 VIF2 : Analog video input/output signal processing
• IC2301 VIC2 : Digital VCR signal processing LSI + SDRAM
• IC2302 AND : AND gate for control signal
• IC2600 CHARACTER GENERATOR : Character generator for LCD, EVF display
• IC2601 INVERTER : Inverter amplifier for clock
PM Section
• IC3201 DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL : Power supply PWM regulator controller
• IC3202 DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL : Power supply PWM regulator controller
• IC3203 4.7V REGULATOR : 4.7V regulator for video, audio, digital control
• IC3219 2.8V REGULATOR : 2.8V regulator
Card Section (MC model only)
• IC4000 FLASH : Memory for card firmware
• IC4001 V53 : Card control
• IC4002 SDRAM : Memory for SIC signal processing
• IC4003 SIC : Card video processing, Card interface
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-2
(2) SUB P.C.B.
Servo Section
• IC300 MOTOR DRIVE : Drum, Capstan, Loading motor drive
• FL300 5.6V REGULATOR : 5.6V regulator for motor drive
• Remote control light receptor, tally lamp
Gyro Section
• IC1601 P SENSOR GYRO : Pitch direction angular velocity detection
• IC1602 Y SENSOR GYRO : Yaw direction angular velocity detection
• IC1603 SW : Switch for gyro sensor output reset
• IC1605 OPE AMP : Operational amplifier for gyro sensor output signal
(3) CA P.C.B.
Camera Section
• IC1001 TIMING GENERATOR : Timing generator for CCD drive
• IC1003 CDS/AGC/AD : CCD output signal sampling, AGC, A/D converter
• IC1005 VCO PLL : Camera clock phase lock
• IC1006 INVERTER : Inverter amplifier for clock
• IC1007,8,9 AND : AND gate for clock voltage conversion
(4) CCD P.C.B.
• IC1000 CCD : CCD image sensor
(5) AUDIO P.C.B.
• IC701 OPE AMP : Operational amplifier for microphone
• IC801 AUDIO INTERFACE : Analog input/output signal processing
• IC802 A/D,D/A CONVERTER : Audio signal A/D,D/A conversion
• IC803 5.0V REGULATOR : 5.0V regulator
(6) LCD P.C.B.
• IC901 EEPROM : EEPROM for LCD data
• IC902 LCD INTERFACE : LCD signal processing, drive
• IC4201 DC/DC CONVERTER : Backlight drive
(7) CVF P.C.B.
Signal relay from MAIN P.C.B. to CVF-LCD, Backlight LED illumination
(8) MULTI P.C.B.
Connector for Docking unit (DU-300)
(9) LI P.C.B.
Backup lithium battery terminal, Power LED, START/STOP SW
(10) MMC P.C.B.
Connector for card insertion
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-3
2. Power Supply Circuit
2-1 Startup of Power Supply
• Lithium Battery for BackupLI3V from the lithium battery is input at pin 3 of IC200, then output from pin 6 as power supply for the SUB MI-COM. This allowsthe SUB MI-COM to provide data backup and a clock function when main power supply is not connected.If the lithium battery voltage drops below 2.6V (or even when lithium battery is not mounted), IC200 outputs an “L” signal frompin 2, and when power is ON, the SUB MI-COM receives the “L” signal and sends it to the MAIN MI-COM, which providesa warning indication for the lithium battery.
• Main Power SupplyVTR UNREG from the main power supply enters pin 7 of IC200, is converted to 3V by the internal regulator, and is then output asE3V from pin 8. The signal is also replaced with LI3V by the internal switch and then output from pin 6 as power supply to theSUB MI-COM.Upon receiving VTR UNREG, IC200 outputs “L” signal from pin 4. SUB MI-COM receives this and recognizes that the mainpower supply is connected, then carries out initialization of the mechanisms after which it enters a standby status. In this condition,SUB MI-COM performs detection of switches related to startup, and outputs VTR ON “H” signal from pin 48 upon detection. Bymeans of VTR ON signal, the recorder power supply is started up and the MAIN MI-COM is also started. If camera mode has beenselected, the MAIN MI-COM receives this signal from the SUB MI-COM and outputs CAM ON “H” signal which starts up the
camera power supply.
3 7
26
25
24
21
20
48 137
8
4
6
5
43
4
15
232
DET
RESET
SW
E3V
3V
E3V or LI3V
E3V DET
VCC
VTR UNREG
EJECT SW
CN13SW0
SW1
SW2
CN14 CN1
LITHIUM BATTERY
LI3V
FROMBATTERY
MAIN SW0
TP204
FROM DMC II
VTR ON
PM SECTION
CAM ON
TP202
TP203
MAIN SW1
MAIN SW2
EJECT SW
CASSETTEIN SW
VTR ON
RESET L
LI3 DET
CAM ON
SERIAL DATAIC203SUB MI-COM.
IC100MAIN
MI-COM.IC200
E 3V REG. RESET
CN200
3VREG.
2.6VDET.
1
6
4
1
2
10 8MAIN P.C.B.
FE FPC
MMC P.C.B.
LI P.C.B.
26, 27
MAINDIAL
MAIN DIALCARD PLAYVCROFFMOVIEP.SCANCARD REC
SW0HLLLHH
SW1HHHLLL
SW2LLHHHL
CN11
15
17
25
24 3
Fig. 2-1
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-4
2-2 Power Fuses
Power from the battery is divided into four systems by FU3201,2 on MAIN P.C.B.
(1) UNREG (VS) : FU3201
DRUM/CAPSTAN VS, 5V system power supply, Lens motor, Recorder motor driver, CVF backlight power supply
(2) UNREG (DC/DC) : FU3201
DC/DC CONVERTER CONTROL IC power supply
(3) VTR UNREG : FU3202
1.7V system power supply, CCD -6.5V/15V, LCD12V, E3V, LANC, LCD backlight power supply
(4) UNREG (3V) : FU3202
2.3V system, 3V system power supply
Fig. 2-2
MAIN P.C.B.
9
1 TP3203, 4
FU3201TP3201, 2
1 2
4 3
FU3202
UNREG (VS)FROMBATTERYTERMINAL UNREG (DC/DC)
VTR UNREG
UNREG (3V)
1 2
4 3
14 BATT + +BATT − −6
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-5
2-3 Power Supply CircuitFigure 2-3 shows the various power supply circuits.
The ON/OFF of each power supply is controlled by VTR ON output from SUB MI-COM and CAM ON output from MAIN MI-COM.
IC3201DC/DC
CONVERTERCONTROL
IC3202DC/DC
CONVERTERCONTROL
46 1 2
39
Q3202REG.PWM
CH-1
UNREG (VS)
IN OUTDVDD 4.7VHA 4.7V
DIF 2.8V
MO 5V
IC32034.7V REG.
10
21
Q3213REG.PWM
CH-1
VTR UNREG
VTR ON
Q3209, 10 (1/2)
LCD 12V
11
19
Q3212REG.PWM
CH-2
VTR UNREG
CAM ON
Q3208, 10 (2/2)
CCD 15V
13
16
Q3211, 14REG.PWM
CH-3
VTR UNREG
CCD -6.5V
50
5
1
436
Q3216Q3201, 5
Q3227
REG.PWM
CH-2
UNREG (3V)
IN OUTON
HA3.0V, DVDD 3.0V, A3.0V, CARD 3.0V, LCD 3.0V
CAM 3.0V
CAM 2.3V
AVDD 2.3V, DVDD 2.3V
IC32192.8V REG.
56
33
Q3204REG.PWM
CH-3
ON/OFF
UNREG (3V)
DVDD 1.7V, DIC 1.7V57
29
ON/OFF30
ON/OFFVTR ON
CAM ON
6
CH
2 O
N
CH
3 O
N
4 3
19
Q3203REG.PWM
CH-4
VTR UNREG
Fig.2-3
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-6
3. Signal Processing Circuit
3-1 Outline of Signal Processing Circuit
Figure 2-4 shows the overall block diagram of the signal processing circuit and the flow of video and audio signals.
Fig. 2-4
LENS IC1000CCD
MMC P.C.B.
AUDIO P.C.B.
CCD P.C.B. CA P.C.B.
LCD P.C.B.
MAIN P.C.B.
Card
IC1101DIC4
IC4002SDRAM
MC model only
IC2000VRP2
LCD
CVFLCD
REC/PBHEAD
IC2600CG
IC1502EVF
DRIVER
IC902LCD
DRIVER
IC2100VIF2
DV
AV
MIC
IC802A/D, D/A
IC801AIF
JACK FPC
VIDEO
AUDIO
IC4003SIC
SDRAM
VIC2
IC1102SDRAM
IC1003CDSAGCA/D
IC1001TG
IC2301
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-7
3-2 Camera, Card Signal Processing
(1) Camera
<CCD> IC1000
• 1/4 inch • Primary color filter
• 680,000 pixels (including electronic IS area) • All pixel readout
• Single-line double-speed readout :Readout clock is set for double speed, and both odd and even parts are read out in a single
field period (progressive mode).
<CDS/AGC/AD> IC1003
Signal read out from CCD is subjected to sample hold, AGC processing, A/D conversion, and then output as a digital signal.
<DIC4> IC1101
Carries out Y/C separation, various camera signal processing (EIS, AWB, etc.), and digital effect processing. Since, at playback,
digital effect processing is applied to the playback signal, CH-2 is for input and CH-1 for output.
<SDRAM> IC1102
Field memory for signal processing, digital effect.
(2) Card (MC model only)
<SIC> IC4003
When the card function is not operated, camera signal is sent directly to VIC2.
• Video signal capture function
• Video signal switch (card mix function)
• JPEG compression/decompression
• Image enlargement/reduction
• Card interface
<SDRAM> IC4002
Image data memory used at Card write-in, readout.
<V53> IC4001
A CPU for the card circuit, which executes firmware located in the flash memory (IC4000), communicates with the MAIN MI-
COM via SIC, and conducts various card processing through control of SIC.
Fig. 2-5
IC1000CCD
IC1102SDRAM
CardIC4002SDRAM
IC4001V53
CH-1
CH-2
A DATA
B DATAIC1001DIC4
IC4003SIC
TOIC2301
VIC
IC1003CDS/AGC/AD
: ANALOG
36MHz10bit36MHz
8bit27MHz
8bit27MHz
: DIGITAL
SW
SW
TRANSACTION
MC model only
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-8
Card Recording (CAMERA)
(1) DIC4 captures image initially for matching recorded image with image displayed on LCD.
(2) SIC stores image in SDRAM (IC4002).
(3) SIC applies JPEG compression to image, and starts writing into Card.
(4) VIC2 captures image and DIC4 releases the capture function.
(5) DIC4 starts camera signal processing, and provides movie image display.
(6) When SIC finishes write-in to Card, VIC2 releases the capture function.
Card Recording (VCR, DV input)
(1) VIC2 captures image.
(2) By way of SIC (B DATA) and DIC4 (CH-2), SIC again stores in SDRAM (IC4002) the image captured in SIC (CH-1).
(3) SIC applies JPEG compression to the image, and starts writing into Card.
(4) When SIC finishes write-in to Card, VIC2 releases the capture function.
(At playback/recording: Image from VIC2 appearing at LCD and video output is A DATA image via SIC, DIC4.)
(At DV input: Image from VIC2 appearing at LCD and video output is the image captured at (1).)
Card Playback
(1) SIC decompresses the Card file.
(2) SIC stores an image in SDRAM (IC4002).
(3) VIC2 captures an image (A DATA) and outputs it at LCD and video output.
Card Mixing
The selected image that has been decompressed at Card and stored in SDRAM (IC4002) is mixed with the camera image via the
switch in SIC.
In progressive mode : A DATA and B DATA are mixed with card image.
In interline movie mode : A DATA is mixed with card image.
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-9
3-3 Recorder Signal Processing
< VIC2 >IC2301
• Includes an A/D converter for analog line input plus a Y/C separation filter.
• D/A output for VRP2 control is added.
• A/B DATA: input in camera mode. B DATA is output and A DATA is input at playback. (DIC4 digital effect circuit is used at
playback.)
The video data and signals input to VIC2 are subjected to digital VTR format signal processing. Audio data, subcode data and
ITI data are also created at VIC2, and these signals are output to VRP2 as 41.85 Mbps data of DV format.
• DIF : After conversion to digital data conforming to IEEE1394 standard, the data is output at DV terminal. At digital input, the
data enters VIC2 signal processing circuit via the opposite route.
< VRP2 >IC2000
• Recording data of 41.85 Mbps output from VIC2 is amplified at VRP2, and is recorded on magnetic tape while undergoing head
switching of CH-1, CH-2 with a switching pulse. At playback, the head output signal is amplified and sent to VIC2.
< VIF2 >IC2100
• Related parts are reduced in comparison to conventional VIF, and a sync separation function for analog line input is added. Y
and C signals sent from VIC2 are output as Y, C signals for S terminal (DU-300) and composite video.
At line input, input signals undergo level adjustment, sync signal separation and are output to VIC2.
< EVF DRIVER >IC1502
EVF driver, formerly mounted on CVF P.C.B., has been moved to MAIN P.C.B., and displays on CVF LCD an image based on R,
G, B and sync signals from VIC2.
Fig. 2-6
AV JACKS TERMINAL
CVFLCD
LCD
IC4003SIC
(ELURA20 MC)
IC1001DIC4
(ELURA10)
A DATA
B DATA
R,G,B
D/AIC2100VIF2
IC1502EVF
DRIVER
IC2301 VIC2
IC2000VRP2
DV TERMINAL
AV JACKIC802A/DD/A
VIDEOHEAD
VIDEOINTERFACE
A/D
SDRAM
REC/PBPROCESS
ECCCOMPRESSION/DEMOD.
BUS
SDRAMINTERFACE
DIFINTERFACE
AUDIO INTERFACE
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-10
3-4 Audio Signal Flow
<MIC AMP> IC701
Processing is applied to output signal of microphone element C whereby it is mixed with L and R signals. The former nondirectional
microphone is thus changed to a stereo microphone having directivity
< AIF >IC801
Carries out switching between internal and external microphones (by means of serial data from MAIN MI-COM), plus ALC (Auto
Level Control), and amplification of each output signal.
Also, the shutter sound at card recording from the CAMERA MI-COM and the beep tone issued at ejection from the MAIN MI-
COM are added to the speaker output signal in AIF.
< A/D,D/A >IC802
Carries out analog - digital signal conversion. Sampling frequency is output from VIC2 and is Fs=32 KHz or Fs=48 KHz depend-
ing on the audio mode. Quantization bit number is 12 bits in case of 32 KHz or 16 bits in case of 48 KHz.
Fig. 2-7
IC701MIC
Q803, 4
IC801AIF
IC802A/DD/A
CAMERAMI-COM
SHUTTERBEEP 2
BEEP 1
BEEP LEV
MAIN MI-COMBEEPCONT.
IC2301VIC2
IC2000VRP2
R
LC
SPEAKERAMP
AMP
REC/PBHEAD
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
L+R+
-
R
L
R
L
R
EXT.MIC
HEADPHONE
AVJACK
SPEAKER
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-11
4. System Control, Servo
4-1 Outline of System Control, Servo
Figure 2-8 shows the overall configuration of the system control & servo circuit, plus the flow of data. System control is mainly
performed by the MAIN MI-COM (IC100) on MAIN P.C.B.
Fig. 2-8
HEAD
M
FG/PG
DRUM
CAPSTAN
LOADING
FG
M
M
AUDIOP.C.B.
MMCP.C.B.
DMC IICA P.C.B. MAIN P.C.B. SUB P.C.B.
LCD P.C.B.
IC1001TG
IC1404EVR
IC901EEPROM
IC902LCD
DRIVER
IC1501EVR
IC1502EVF
DRIVER
IC2600CG
IC201EEPROM
IC1403EEPROM
IC1304MOTORDRIVER
IC3201DC/DC
CONVERTER
IC1401CAMERAMI-COM
DIALSW
IC100MAIN
MI-COM
IC1101DIC4
IC4003SIC
IC4001V53
IC230VIC2
IC203SUB
MI-COM
IC2100VIF2
IC801AIF
MULTIJACK
LANC JACK
DOCKING UNITDU-300
IC200VRP2
IC202LANC
I/F
Card
IC1003CDSAGCA/D
LENS
PW
M D
PW
M C
CAMERA KEY
R-KEY
EJECT SW
MAIN DIAL
IC300MOTORDRIVER
CAPSTANDRIVER
DRUMDRIVER
MODE SWC.DOWN SW
BOT/EOT SENS.DEW
REEL FG
MIC
LOADINGDRIVER
D-VS
C-VS
DFG/PG
CFG
ZOOMSW
MC model only
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-12
4-2 Major Functions of Each Microcomputer
(1) MAIN MI-COM (IC100)
The MAIN MI-COM, as the nucleus of the system, carries out control of mode transition plus mechanism control through commu-
nication with CAMERA MI-COM. It also detects the input of various sensors and switches (DMCII). Following are the major
functions.
• VIC2 (Video IC) control/VIF2 (Video Interface) control/AIF (Audio Interface) control
• Control in accordance with IEEE1394
• Key input
• LANC communication
• LCD control
• OSD (On Screen Display) control
• DMCII mechanism control
(2) SUB MI-COM (IC203)
The SUB MI-COM is mainly in charge of the power-on sequence and charging control. Following are the major functions.
• Key input
• Remote control input
• Power ON/OFF control
• MIC (Memory In Cassette) control
(3) CAMERA MI-COM (IC1401)
Carries out lens control and camera signal processing. Following are the major functions.
• CCD drive control
• AE, AF, AWB control
• EIS (Electric Image Stabilizer) control
• Zoom key input
4-3 Servo Control
Servo control is made by the MAIN MI-COM. and VIC2 the same as heretofore. The MAIN MI-COM. controls motor ON/OFF,
turning direction, etc. and VIC2 controls the speed of revolution, phase and outputs the signal. The signal flow is such that VIC2 detects
the FG/PG, PB-RF, etc. from motor and send them to the MAIN MI-COM. The MAIN MI-COM generates the error signal and outputs
it to the VIC2 again. The VIC2 outputs the error signal (PWM), and the MAIN P.C.B. drives that signal and sends it to the motor driver
IC as a control voltage.
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-13
4-4 Error Detection
If an anomaly has been produced in any rotation drive system (drum, capstan, reel, loading), a relevant mode enters. The LCD indicates
“Please unload the cassette” and blinks “EJECT.”
4-4-1 Error Detecting Conditions
The following table gives error detecting conditions.
4-4-2 Processing after Error Detection
The following table gives processing after error detection.
• Pop up : Error display→error eject → pop up →error clear
• Error stop : Error display→STOP position (not cleared unless EJECTED)
Kind Condition Detection
Drum error Error detecting mode Starting / steady D-FG
FG frequency when steady 900Hz
Error detecting level Starting: Beyond 80-150%.
Steady : 30% max.
Error detecting time Starting : 5sec.
Steady : 0.5sec.
Capstan error Error detecting mode Starting / steady C-FG
FG frequency when steady 1347Hz
Error detecting level Starting : 80% max.
Steady : 100Hz max.
Error detecting time Starting : 2sec.
Steady : 0.5sec.
Reel error Error detecting mode Normal / UNLOAD T, S-REEL FG
Error detection Normally : C-FG number per reel FG cycle is C-FG
2.4×1347 or more.
UNLOAD : Reel FG half cycle is 1 sec or more
(Take-up reel only for both)
Loading error Error detecting mode Mode transfer Mode SW
Error detection Mode transfer time
STANDBY-STOP : 6sec
STANDBY-POPUP : 3sec
STOP-PLAY : 3sec
Cassette in LoadingDuringloading
Loadingcompleted
During tape running
During mode
Drum error Pop up Pop up Error stop Error stop Error stop Error stop
Capstan error Pop up ------- Error stop Error stop Error stop Error stop
Reel error ------- ------- Error stop Error stop Error stop Error stop
Loading error Pop up Pop up Error stop Error stop ------- Error stop
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-14
4-5 IC Terminal Functions
4-5-1 CAMERA MI-COM (IC1401)
PIN NAME I/O FUNCTIONREMARKS
PG BK ADDR DATA BIT
1 VCC CAM 2.3V
2 CG STB O CG strobe output (for development/plant use)
3 I ISW O Bypass capacitor charging SW (for Gyro output) 5 0 9027 5
4,5 - O Unused
6 VCCB1 CAM 3V
7 VSSB1 GND
8 ADJ SW I (Pull up) for plant adjustment 5 0 9022 0
9 ADJ CS O CS for plant adjustment 5 0 9022 1
10 NT XPL SEL I Camera microcomputer NTSC/PAL selection 5 0 9022 2
11 TG NP SEL O TG NTSC/PAL selection (connect to /NPSEL of TG) 5 0 9022 3
12 TG SEN O TG serial communication enable signal 5 0 9022 4
13 X TG RST O TG reset signal 5 0 9022 5
14 DA LOAD O D/A load pulse (to LD of MB88347L) 5 0 9022 6
15 X AGC CS O AGC chip select 5 0 9022 7
16 VCCB1 CAM 3V
17 VSSB1 GND
18 IRIS CL O Unused
19 IRIS OP O Unused
20 X IRIS GAIN O Iris gain 5 0 9023 2
21 LED RET O Lens LED illumination 5 0 9023 3
22 X F PSV O Focus power save 5 0 9023 4
23 X Z PSV O Zoom power save 5 0 9023 5
24 F RES SW I Focus reset detection (Pull Down) 5 0 9023 6
25 Z RES SW I Zoom reset detection (Pull Down) 5 0 9023 7
26 X PC CS O For AF debugging 5 0 9024 0
27 CAM DIC RST O CAM DIC RST (to MODE) 5 0 9024 1
28 X PC ACK I/O For AF debug/WB debug 5 0 9024 2
29 X DIC4 RST O Unused 5 0 9024 3
30 EEP INI I EEPROM initialization (Pull Up) 5 0 9024 4
31 X EEP CS O EEPROM chip select (to CS)(Pull Up) 5 0 9024 5
32 X EEP WP O EEPROM write protect (to WC)(Pull Up) 5 0 9024 6
33 EEP RB I EEPROM READY/BUSY (to R/B) 5 0 9024 7
34 VCCB1 CAM 3V
35 VSSB1 GND
36 CAM CS O SUB MI-COM communication CS 5 0 9025 0
37 DIC4 RST DET I From Mode DIC4 RST OUT 5 0 9025 1
38 CAM RX O SUB MI-COM send/receive discrimination signal 5 0 9025 2
39 DIC CS O DIC CS (To DIC) 5 0 9025 3
40 FIC CS O FIC CS (To DIC) 5 0 9025 4
41 PWM CS O PWM CS (To DIC) 5 0 9025 5
42 DIC READ O DIC data read (Pull Down) 5 0 9025 6
43 FID I Field index input (From DIC) 5 0 9025 7
44 TEST1 TEST OUT1
45 TEST2 TEST OUT2
46 TEST3 TEST OUT3
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-15
PIN NAME I/O FUNCTIONREMARKS
PG BK ADDR DATA BIT
47 WB SET WB SET (for debug)
48 VCCB1 CAM 3V
49 - Unused
50 VSSB1 GND
51 VSS GND
52~65 - Unused
66 VCCP CAM 3V
67,8 - Unused
69 VSS GND
70,1 - Unused
72 Shutter Audio O PWM output (for shutter sound) 5 0 902B 3
73~79 - Unused
80 SCLK3 O TG/AGC/DA serial clock 5 0 902A 1
81 SDI3 I Unused
82 SDO3 O TG/AGC/DA serial data send 5 0 9029 7
83 - Unused
84 MtoC SCLK I SUB serial clock 5 0 9029 4
85 MtoC DATA I SUB serial data receive 5 0 9029 3
86 CtoM DATA O SUB serial data send 5 0 9029 2
87 - Unused
88 VCCP CAM 3V
89 VSSP GND
90,1 - Unused
92 DIC SCLK1 O DIC serial clock 5 0 9028 7
93 DtoC DATA1 I DIC serial data receive 5 0 9028 6
94 CtoD DATA1 O DIC serial data send 5 0 9028 5
95,6 - Unused
97 SCLK0 O EEPROM serial clock 5 0 9028 2
98 SDI0 I EEPROM serial data receive 5 0 9028 1
99 SDO0 O EEPROM serial data send 5 0 9028 0
100 VCC CAM 2.3V
101 VCCP CAM 3V
102 JTAG I FP (JTAG terminal)(Pull Up)
103 TDO FP (JTAG terminal)
104 TDI Pull Up (JTAG terminal)
105 TMS Pull Up (JTAG terminal)
106 TRCLK Unused
107 EVENT0 Unused
108 EVENT1 Unused
109 TCK FP (JTAG terminal)
110 TRST# Connect to reset IC output
111 VSSP GND
112 FP Pull Down (flash protect)
113 MODE2 GND
114 MODE1 GND
115 MODE0 MCU mode fixed (Pull Down)
116 FVCC CAM 2.3V (flash erase program)
117 VSS GND
118 RESET Connect to reset IC output
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-16
PIN NAME I/O FUNCTIONREMARKS
PG BK ADDR DATA BIT
119 GND
120 OSCVCC CAM 2.3V (=VCC)
121 XIN Main clock input
122 OSCVSS GND
123 XOUT O Main clock output
124 PLLVCC CAM 2.3V
125 PLLCAP PLL condenser connection
126 PLLVSS Connect to GND
127,8 - Unused
129 VSSB0 GND
130 VCCB0 CAM 3V
131 CAM SS TIM2 O Slow shutter timing signal (to Mode) 5 0 9021 5
132 CAM SS TIM1 O Slow shutter timing signal (to Mode) 5 0 9021 4
133~139 - Unused
140 VCCP CAM 3V
141 VSSP GND
142 SBI I System break interrupt (Pull Down)
143 X VD I VD signal (from DIC) 5 0 902C 0
144 - Unused
145 CAM REQ I M to C mode microcomputer communication request 5 0 902C 2
(Pull Down)
146 X PC REQ I/O For AF debug/WB debug (for development)
147 ADJ REQ I For plant adjustment (Pull Down)
148,9 - Unused
150 VCC CAM 2.3V
151 VSS GND
152~156 - Unused
157 VCCP CAM 3V
158 VSSP GND
159~176 - Unused
177 XCIN CAM 2.3V
178 VSSR GND (real time clock GND)
179 XCOUT O Unused
180 VCCR CAM 3V (real time clock power supply)
181 AVREF A/D reference voltage input (connect to CAM 3V)
182 AVCC A/D power supply input (connect to CAM 3V)
183 Y GYRO I Yaw direction gyro input 5 0 32DE,32DF
184 P GYRO I Pitch direction gyro input 5 0 32E0,32E1
185,6 - Connect to GND
187 I ENC I Iris encoder AD input 5 0 2DC8,2C9H
188 ZOOM KEY I Zoom key AD input 5 0 2B95
189 TM SENS I Temperature compensation AD input (Pull Down) 5 0 3136
190 - Connect to GND
191~198 - Unused
199 AVSS Connect to GND
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-17
4-5-2 MAIN MI-COM (IC100)
PIN NAME I/O FUNCTIONREMARKS
PG BK ADDR DATA BIT
1 VCC DVDD 2.2V
2 VIF CS O VIF chip select 7 2 D7 3
3 XECSV O VIC2 (VIC CS) chip select 7 2 D7 2
4 XECSI O VIC2 (DIF CS) chip select 7 2 D7 1
5 OPT CS O OPT chip select (for factory adjustment) 7 2 D7 0
6 VCCB BUS power supply = DVDD3V
7 VSSB BUS GND
8 MIRR O Panel OSD OFF during mirror mode 7 2 D2 7
9 BEEP LEVEL O Warning buzzer level control 7 2 D2 6
10 SIC RESET O SIC RESET 7 2 D2 5
11 SIC BBUSSEL O SIC B data bus input/output control 7 2 D2 4
12 SIC PSB O SIC power save 7 2 D2 3
13 MMC ON O MMC power ON/OFF control (fixed at ON) 7 2 D2 2
14 SIC CS O SIC chip select 7 2 D2 1
15 VCO HI O VRP VCO power save 7 2 D2 0
16 VCCB Bus power supply = DVDD3V
17 VSSB Bus GND
18 XRESET O VIC initial signal 7 2 D3 7
19 EADDR6 O Address bus (VIC2) 7 2 D3 6
20 EADDR5 O Address bus (VIC2) 7 2 D3 5
21 EADDR4 O Address bus (VIC2) 7 2 D3 4
22 EADDR3 O Address bus (VIC2) 7 2 D3 3
23 EADDR2 O Address bus (VIC2) 7 2 D3 2
24 EADDR1 O Address bus (VIC2) 7 2 D3 1
25 EADDR0 O Address bus LSB (VIC2) 7 2 D3 0
26 EDATA15 I/O Data bus MSB (VIC2) 7 2 D4 7
27 EDATA14 I/O Data bus (VIC2) 7 2 D4 6
28 EDATA13 I/O Data bus (VIC2) 7 2 D4 5
29 EDATA12 I/O Data bus (VIC2) 7 2 D4 4
30 EDATA11 I/O Data bus (VIC2) 7 2 D4 3
31 EDATA10 I/O Data bus (VIC2) 7 2 D4 2
32 EDATA9 I/O Data bus (VIC2) 7 2 D4 1
33 EDATA8 I/O Data bus (VIC2) 7 2 D4 0
34 VCCB Bus power supply = DVDD3V
35 VSSB Bus GND
36 EDATA7 I/O Data bus (VIC2) 7 2 D5 7
37 EDATA6 I/O Data bus (VIC2) 7 2 D5 6
38 EDATA5 I/O Data bus (VIC2) 7 2 D5 5
39 EDATA4 I/O Data bus (VIC2) 7 2 D5 4
40 EDATA3 I/O Data bus (VIC2) 7 2 D5 3
41 EDATA2 I/O Data bus (VIC2) 7 2 D5 2
42 EDATA1 I/O Data bus (VIC2) 7 2 D5 1
43 EDATA0 I/O Data bus LSB (VIC2) 7 2 D5 0
44 VIC XERD O VIC2 7 2 D6 3
45 VIC XEWR O VIC2 7 2 D6 2
46 WIDE CONT O S1 signal control output 7 2 D6 1
47 LINE IN O LINE input circuit control 7 2 D6 4
48 VCCB Bus power supply = DVDD3V
49 BCLK Check pad 7 2 D6 0
50 VSSB GND
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-18
PIN NAME I/O FUNCTIONREMARKS
PG BK ADDR DATA BIT
51 VSS GND
52 CAM RX DATA I Camera communication data discrimination 7 2 DD 3
53 DIC2S FI I DIC shrink FI (not used) 7 2 DD 2
54 CAM SS TMG1 I Camera still picture control 1 input 7 2 DD 1
55 CAM SS TMG2 I Camera still picture control 2 input 7 2 DD 0
56 PHOTO SW I Memory switch full pressing detection input 7 2 DE 7
57 HALF PHOTO SW I Memory switch half pressing detection input 7 2 DE 6
58 START/STOP I Trigger switch input 7 2 DE 5
59 PAE/GREEN SW I PAE mode select switch detection input 7 2 DE 4
60 PANEL OPEN SW I Panel open switch detection input 7 2 DE 3
61 PANEL BOTTOM/TOP SW I Panel BOTTOM/TOP switch detection input 7 2 DE 2
62 CASSETTE IN SW I CASSETTE IN switch detection input 7 2 DE 1
63 REC PROOF SW I Record inhibit switch detection input 7 2 DE 0
64 DIAL CW SW I Dial detection input 7 2 DF 7
65 DIAL CCW SW I Dial detection input 7 2 DF 6
66 VCCP DVDD3V
67 AIF CS O AIF2 chip select output 7 2 DB 0
68 EXT CONT O External microphone detection output 7 2 DB 1
69 VSSP GND
70 PD DA O Audio DA power save control 7 2 DB 2
71 PD AD O Audio AD power save control 7 2 DB 3
72 A MUTE O Audio mute 7 2 DB 4
73 A EMP2 O Audio emphasis setting 7 2 DB 5
74 A EMP1 O Audio emphasis setting 7 2 DB 6
75 AUD ON O Speaker/headphones power supply control 7 2 DB 7
76 BUZZER CARRIER2 O Buzzer 2 output 7 2 DA 0
77 BUZZER CARRIER1 O Buzzer 1 output 7 2 DA 1
78 RESERVE2 I V53 firmware update status detection 7 2 DA 2
79 TEST1 For factory adjustment 7 2 DA 3
80 EVF SENS O IC chip select for EVF drive 7 2 DA 6
81 LANC IN I LANC data input 7 2 DA 7
82 LANC OUT O LANC data output 7 2 D9 0
83 EVF DA LOAD O DA converter load for EVF 7 2 D9 1
84 AIF/VIF/SUB SCK I/O Serial clock (AIF/VIF/SUB MI-COM) 7 2 D9 3
85 SUB SI I Serial bus data input (SUB MI-COM) 7 2 D9 4
86 AIF/VIF/SUB SO O Serial bus data output (AIF/VIF/SUB MI-COM) 7 2 D9 5
87 PANEL IC CS O LCD interface chip select output 7 2 D9 2
88 VCCP DVDD3V
89 VSSP GND
90 PANEL EEPROM CS O LCD EEPROM chip select output 7 2 D9 6
91 MAIN EEPROM CS O EEPROM chip select output 7 2 D9 7
92 OSD/EEPROM/DA SCK O OSDC/EEPROM/LCD EEPROM/DA/EVFIC/LCDIC 7 2 D8 0
93 EEPROM SI I Serial data input (EEPROM/LCD EEPROM) 7 2 D8 1
94 OSD/EEPROM/DA SO O OSD/EEPROM/LCD EEPROM/DA/EVFIC/LCD 7 2 D8 2
Data output
95 DIC4 CONT O DIC4 control output 7 2 D8 3
96 DIC4 CS O DIC4 chip select output 7 2 D8 4
97 CAM/DIC4/SIC SCK I Serial clock input (CAMERA MI-COM/DIC4/SIC) 7 2 D8 5
98 CAM/SIC SI I Serial data input (CAMERA MI-COM/SIC) 7 2 D8 6
99 CAM/DIC4/SIC SO O Serial clock output (CAMERA MI-COM/DIC4/SIC) 7 2 D8 7
100 VCC DVDD2.2V
101 VCCP DVDD3V
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-19
PIN NAME I/O FUNCTIONREMARKS
PG BK ADDR DATA BIT
102 EMULATOR I 10K pull up (FP) emulator (for factory adjustment)
103 JTAG/EMULATOR/FLASH O FP (for factory adjustment)
104 JTAG/EMULATOR/FLASH I 10K pull up (for factory adjustment)
105 JTAG/EMULATOR/FLASH I 10K pull up (for factory adjustment)
106 EMULATOR O FP (emulator) (for factory adjustment)
107 EMULATOR O FP (emulator) (for factory adjustment)
108 EMULATOR O FP (emulator) (for factory adjustment)
109 JTAG/EMULATOR/FLASH I 10K pull up (for factory adjustment)
110 JTAG/EMULATOR I 10K pull down (for factory adjustment)
111 VSSP GND
112 FLASH I 10K pull down
(This terminal is open in the mask version.)
113 GND GND
114 GND GND
115 MODE 10K pull down (for factory adjustment)
116 EMULATOR/FLASH 10K pull down (for factory adjustment)
117 VSS GND
118 REST IN Reset signal input
119 VSS GND
120 OSCVCC DVDD2.3V
121 XIN I 20 MHz
122 OSCVSS GND
123 XOUT O 20 MHz
124 PLLCVCC DVDD2.3V
125 PLLCAP External capacitor for PLL is connected to this terminal
126 PLLVSS GND
127 OSDC CS O OSDC IC chip select output 7 2 D1 0
128 OSDC RESET O OSDC reset output 7 2 D1 1
129 VSSB GND
130 VCCB DVDD3V
131 - O Unused 7 2 D1 2
132 - O Unused 7 2 D1 3
133 - O Unused 7 2 D1 4
134 FCHO I Factory process mode/soft debug terminal 0 7 2 D0 0
(for factory adjustment)
135 - O Unused 7 2 D1 5
136 CAM M RST I CAMERA MI-COM reset output 7 2 D0 1
137 CAM PW ON O Camera power supply control 7 2 D1 6
138 DA CFG O DA CFG (for factory adjustment) 7 2 DA 5
139 LET CONT O S1 signal letter box output 7 2 DA 4
140 VCCP DVDD3V
141 VSSP GND
142 N.C I 7 2 E1 4
143 XINT M I VIC RP CAPTURE interrupt request input 7 2 DC 7
144 XINT D I VIC DIF interrupt request input 7 2 DC 6
145 XINT C I VIC SDRAM interrupt request input 7 2 DC 5
146 SUB REQ O Communication request input to SUB MI-COM 7 2 DC 4
147 SUB CS I Selection input from SUB MI-COM 7 2 DC 3
148 SIC REQ O Communication request to SIC 7 2 DC 2
149 RESERVE1 O V53 detects enable/disable status 7 2 DC 1
of communication with MAIN MI-COM
150 VCC DVDD2.2V
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-20
PIN NAME I/O FUNCTIONREMARKS
PG BK ADDR DATA BIT
151 VSS GND
152 DIC4 VD I [Interrupt] DIC4 VD input 7 2 DC 0
153 DIC XSYSRST O DIC/FIC reset output 7 2 DD 7
154 CAM CS I [Interrupt] CAMERA MI-COM chip select input 7 2 DD 6
155 CAM PHOTO I Timing signal input for photo(Unused) 7 2 DD 5
156 CAM REQ O CAMERA MI-COM communication request output 7 2 DD 4
157 VCCP DVDD3V
158 VSSP GND
159 RESERVE3 O Unused 7 2 DF 5
160 HP DET I Headphones jack detection input 7 2 DF 4
161 EXT DET I External microphone detection input 7 2 DF 3
162 S DET I S-terminal connection detection 7 2 DF 2
163 PLUG IN I AV multi-terminal insertion detection 7 2 DF 1
164 MCLKEN I Clock enable of camera system 7 2 DF 0
165 LOAD O Loading motor control (LOAD) 7 2 E0 7
166 UNLOAD O Loading motor control (UNLOAD) 7 2 E0 6
167 ID REQ I N.C. (for development investigation) 7 2 E1 3
168 LMO CONT O Loading motor control (CONT) 7 2 E0 5
169 CAP ON O Capstan motor start/stop signal output 7 2 E0 4
170 XIDACK O N.C. (for development investigation) 7 2 E1 2
171 CAP FWD O Capstan motor rotation direction signal output 7 2 E0 3
172 TAPE LED O Tape LED illuminant control 7 2 E0 2
173 N.C O 7 2 E1 1
174 DRUM ON O Drum motor start/stop signal output 7 2 E0 1
175 SELCSLP O Drum driver control 7 2 E1 0
176 REEL LED CONT O Reel sensor LED illumination power save 7 2 E0 0
177 XCIN I 32 KHz
178 VSSR GND
179 XCOUT O 32 KHz
180 VCCR Power flag is set when VCCR decreases to 0.1 V
or less once then increases back to 1.8 V.
181 AVREF DVDD3V
182 AVCC DVDD3V
183 DEWDETECT I Dew condensation detection 7 2 C0
184 KEY AD0 I Operation key detection (STOP, REW, REC, PAUSE) 7 2 C1
185 KEY AD1 I Operation key detection (PLAY, FF, DE, ON/OFF) 7 2 C2
186 KEY AD2 I Operation key detection (MENU, EXP, FOCUS) 7 2 C3
187 KEY AD3 I Operation key detection (EXECUTE) 7 2 C4
188 KEY AD4 I Operation key detection (Unused) 7 2 C5
189 S REEL FG I S-reel FG signal input 7 2 C6
190 T REEL FG I T-reel FG signal input 7 2 C7
191 TAPE TOP AD I Tape top sensor signal input 7 2 C8
192 TAPE END AD I Tape end sensor signal input 7 2 C9
193 MSW AD I Mechanism mode detection 7 2 CA
194 RAGC I VRP AGC signal detection 7 2 CB
195 WIDE DET I S1 signal voltage detection (wide signal detection) 7 2 CC
196 MMC DET I MMC detection; “L” when card present 7 2 CD
197 CARD PRO I Unused 7 2 CE
198 CAM DIC RST I CAM DIC RST (to CAMERA) 7 2 CF
199 AVSS GND
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACAHPTER 2. TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2-21
4-5-3 SUB MI-COM (IC203)
PIN NAME I/O FUNCTIONREMARKS
PG BK ADDR DATA BIT
1 SUB CS O SUB MI-COM communication enable signal 7 3 FC 4
2 RMC PULSE IN I [Interrupt] input signal from remote controller 7 3 FC 3
3 SUB REQ I [Interrupt] MAIN MI-COM communication request input 7 3 FC 2
4 E3V DETECT I [Interrupt] E3V low voltage detection input 7 3 FC 1
5 N.C O 7 3 FC 0
6 LANC PW CONT O LANC power supply control output 7 3 FA 3
7 SCLK2 O SUB MI-COM serial clock output 7 3 FA 2
8 SIN2 O SUB MI-COM serial data output 7 3 FA 1
9 SOUT2 I SUB MI-COM serial data input 7 3 FA 0
10 MIC SCL O Cassette memory communication clock output terminal 7 3 FA 3
11 MIC SDA I/O Cassette memory communication data terminal 7 3 FA 2
12 CNVSS GND
13 XCIN I Sub clock input 7 3 FA 1
14 XCOUT O Sub clock output 7 3 FA 0
15 RESET I Reset signal input
16 XIN I Main clock input
17 XOUT O Main clock output
18 VSS GND
19 DC J DET I DC jack insertion detection (Detection by voltage) 7 3 F9 7
20 CAS IN I CASSETTE IN switch detection 7 3 F9 6
21 EJECT SW I EJECT switch detection 7 3 F9 5
22 LANC ON I LANC power ON detection 7 3 F9 4
23 LI3 DET I Detected power loss of lithium battery for backup 7 3 F9 3
24 MAIN SW2 I Power swich detection 7 3 F9 2
25 MAIN SW1 I Power switch detection 7 3 F9 1
26 MAIN SW0 I Power switch detection 7 3 F9 0
27 VTR PW LED O VTR mode, POWER LED control 7 3 F8 7
28 CAM PW LED O Camera mode, POWER LED control 7 3 F8 6
29 TALLY LED O Tally LED control 7 3 F8 5
30 MIC ON O Cassette memory, power supply control 7 3 F8 4
31 EVF BL ON O 7 3 F8 3
32 N.C O 7 3 F8 2
33 N.C O Charger IC, serial data 7 3 F8 1
34 REC CTL O Recording current forcible OFF control 7 3 F8 0
35 F CH I Function check (for factory adjustment) 7 3 F7
36 SERVICE M S I Main serial is not detected. (for factory adjustment) 7 3 F6
37 MIC3 I Cassette memory/ID board detection 7 3 F5
38 MIC2 I Cassette memory/ID board detection 7 3 F4
39 MIC1 I Cassette memory/ID board detection 7 3 F3
40 - I Connect to GND 7 3 F2
41 BATT INFO AD I Battery type detection 7 3 F1
42 BATT AD I Battery low voltage detection 7 3 F0
43 VCC E3V + LI3V
44 VREF E3V
45 AVSS GND
46 LCD ON O LCD ON/OFF Control 7 3 FC 7
47 LCD BL ON O LCD backlight control 7 3 FC 6
48 VTR ON O VTR power supply control 7 3 FC 5
CHAPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS
CONTENTS
1. List of Maintenance Tools and Supplies --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-1
1-1 List of Maintenance Tools ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-1
1-2 List of Supplies ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-1
2. Settings ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-2
2-1 Recorder Adjustment Setting -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-2
2-1-1 Setting ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-2
3. How to Use Service Remote Controller (DY9-1349-000) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-3
4. Service Modes --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-4
4-1 General --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-4
4-2 Service Mode Indications ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-4
5. Description of Service Modes --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-5
5-1 Error Rate ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-5
5-2 Mechanical Error Indications -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-6
5-3 Camera Special Commands ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-7
5-4 Checking the Lens Resetting -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-8
5-5 Functional Check of Control Keys and Switches --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-8
5-5-1 Voltage Range for A/D Input Key---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-8
6. Service Hints ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-9
6-1 Arrangement of Circuit Boards ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1-9
6-2 Current Consumption Check -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-9
7. Trouble Shooting -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-10
7-1 Power Supply -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------1-10
7-2 Camera Picture Faulty --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-11
7-3 Faulty of Playback Picture ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1-11
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACAHPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS
3-1
1. List of Maintenance Tools and Supplies
1-1 List of Maintenance Tools
1-2 List of Supplies
Item Name Item Number Purpose Remarks
Alignment Tape, (Color bar master/NTSC) DY9-1321-000 Recorder electrical adjustment
Alignment Tape (tracking) DY9-1345-000 Running adjustment DMC II
Cassette Torque Gauge for DV DY9-1346-000 Running adjustment DMC II
Cleaning Tape (normal) – Commercially available DMC II
DV Cleaning Tape (hard) DY9-1359-000 Head cleaning DMC II
Driver bit for tape path adjustment DY9-2053-000 Tape path adjustment DMC II
Color bar chart DY9-2002-000 Camera electrical adjustment
Color Viewer 5600 K for 100V DY9-2039-100 Camera electrical adjustment (JPN)
Color Viewer 5600 K for 115V DY9-2039-115 Camera electrical adjustment (USA)
Lamp for Color Viewer 5600K DY9-2040-000 Replacement
Filter, CCA W12ø46mm DY9-2046-000 Camera electrical adjustment
Remote Commander RM-95 DY9-1349-000 Service mode, electrical adjustment
CZ/Siemens Chart DY9-1372-000 CZ adjustment *Same chart as the
covention model's.
Item Name Item Number Purpose Remarks
Logenest Lambda A-74 CY9-8102-000 Lubrication Lens
Grease GE-C9 CY9-8043-000 Lubrication Lens
Grease GE-X8 CY9-8044-000 Lubrication Lens
Hanarl KS -50 DY9-3047-000 Lubrication Cover
Sponge (W× H × T : 300mm × 200mm × 6mm) DY9-4001-000 General-purpose vibration isolating
/sound absorbing material
Adhesive Tape, No.354E DY9-3032-000 General-purpose adhesive tape
(W× L × T : 9mm × 50m × 0.15mm, UL type)
Adhesive Tape, No. 501F DY9-3034-000 General-purpose
(W × L × T : 10mm × 50m × 0.16mm, UL type) double-side-coated adhesive tape
Sheet, Shield (W × H : 250mm × 250mm) DY9-3036-000 General-purpose shield material
Hanarl FL-778 DY9-3026-010 Lubrication Cover
Floil C-1Z DY9-3039-000 Lubrication Cover
Dia Bond No. 1663 DY9-3009-000 Adhesive
Tape Kapton DY9-3052-000 General-purpose adhesive tape
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACAHPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS
3-2
2. SettingsPerform the AF/EIS/ CAMERA adjustments in a complete-product state.
2-1 Recorder Adjustment Setting
<Purpose>
Check of each section, tape path adjustment, and recorder electrical adjustment are made with the front, rear, left and right coverunits removed.
2-1-1 Setting
<Procedures>
1) Solder the jumper wires (×2), TP2001 (PB-RF) and TP2002 (SWP) on the MAIN P.C.B.2) Connect the cable of the Right Cover unit with the CN102 (R-KEY) and CN3201 (power supply).3) To turn on the power, connect the cable of the Left Cover unit with the CN200 (P-DIAL).
*Connecting the TP203 and TP204 (MAIN P.C.B.) to ground can trun on the power also.4) Operation by a LANC Remote Controller is possible by connecting the Docking Unit (DU-300) with the Multi Connector.5) The power is suppliable via the DC-400 or connecting the Constant Voltage Supplier with the TP3201/3202 (DC+) and the TP3203/
3204 (DC-).
LANC REMOTECOMMANDERRM-95
A/V JACK
RL
V
CN102
CN200
CN3201
DC-400Right Cover Unit
Battery Treminal
A/V JACK
MONITOR TV
Docking Unit(DU-300)
Right Cover Unit
Left Cover Unit
TP202(CAM PW SW)
CN1401
IC1302
IC2000 IC3201
TP204(VTR PW
SW2) TP203(VTR PW SW1)
TP2002(SWP)
TP2001(PB-RF)
TP3203(DC +)
TP3204(DC +)
TP3202(DC −)
TP3201(DC −)
FU3201FU3202MAIN P.C.B.
Fig. 3-1
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACAHPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS
3-3
3. How to Use Service Remote Controller (DY9-1349-000)
(1) Connect the LANC terminal.
(2) To set up the service mode, turn the HOLD SW to the HOLD
position. When the HOLD SW is returned to its home po-
sition, the product is controlled using its own functions.
(3) LCD indications in the service mode:
4) PAGE is indicated while the FOCUS KEY is held down.
5) BANK is indicated.
6) MODE is indicated.
WR when the BATT mark is presented.
7) ADDR is indicated.
8) DT is indicated (hexadecimal).
(4) The following table shows the key functions available in
the service mode.
< Key Functions in Service Mode >
Fig. 3-2
1. HOLD SW 2. PAGE +
3. BANK +4. BANK -
5. ADDRESS +6. ADDRESS -
7. DATA + 8. DATA -
9. STORE
11. PAGE DISPLAY
12. EJECT
10. MODE SELECT
6
4 5 8 7* : * * : * *
No. Key name (in service mode) Function Key name (in normal state)
1 HOLD Transition to service mode by setting to the HOLD HOLD
position
2 PAGE + PAGE is incremented by one. START/STOP
3 BANK + BANK is incremented by one. EDIT SEARCH +
4 BANK - BANK is decremented by one. EDIT SEARCH -
5 ADDRESS + ADDRESS is incremented by one. FF
6 ADDRESS - ADDRESS is decremented by one. REW
7 DATA + DATA is incremented by one. PLAY
8 DATA - DATA is decremented by one. STOP
9 STORE Confirmation/writing of DATA PAUSE
10 MODE SELECT RD/WR mode selection REC REVIEW
11 PAGE DISPLAY PAGE is indicated on LED of remote controller. FOCUS
12 EJECT EJECT operation is performed. COUNTER RESET
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACAHPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS
3-4
4. Service Modes
4-1 General
(1) The service modes are of a command input type using LANC communication.
(2) In the command-input-type service mode, operation mode transition in the main unit can be performed using the keys equipped on
it. Also, by returning the HOLD SW to the normal mode position, the operation mode transition on the main unit can be pefrormed
with the service remote controller.
(3) In the command-input-type service mode, the mechanism error, dew, insufficiency of power and other safety detecting functions
are ineffective.
(4) In the command-input-type service mode, the LCD mirror function is ineffective.
4-2 Service Mode Indications
Shown below are the on-screen indications to be given in the service modes.
1) Indicates that the service mode is set up (“SERV”).
2) Indicates which block is subjected to the command (“MAIN”, “CAM”, “SUB” microcomputer etc.).
3) Indicates a message for a special command (“DATA”, “SUB” etc.).
4) PG : Indicates the PAGE being selected (“4” to “7”).
5) BK :Indicates the BANK being selected (“0” to “7”).
6) MD :Indicates the MODE being selected (RD/WR).
7) ADDR : Indicates the ADDRESS being selected in hexadecimal (**00 to **FF, 0000 to FFFF).
8) DT : Indicates the DATA being read or set in hexadecimal (00 to FF).
9) DT : Indicates the DATA being read or set in binary (********), except for some special functions.
10) ST : Indicates the STATUS in progress (“OK”,“NG”, “BUSY” etc.).
11) Indicates an absolute track number.
12) E0 : Indicates an error rate on a track traced by the CH0 (low channel) head.
13) E1 : Indicates an error rate on a track traced by the CH1 (high channel) head.
14) Indicates a version number of the MAIN microcomputer.
15) Indicates a version number of the SUB microcomputer.
16) Indicates a version number of the CAMERA microcomputer.
17) Indicates a firmware version for Card control. (MC model only)
Fig. 3-3
00::: 00000
CD
O
MAMDCA
(
( (
)((
)(
(( ( ( ( ( (
)
)
) )
)) ) ) ) ) )
P
P
G BK MD ADDR D T S
SERV
T
S T1
2 3
4 5 6 7 8
9
10
11
( )17
14
15
16
E E10 ( ) ( )12 13
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACAHPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS
3-5
5. Description of Service Modes
5-1 Error Rate
<Generals>
(1) A VIDEO error rate (VIDEO + AUDIO) and an AUDIO error rate can be checked.
(2) Note that the error rate is worsened on occurrence of failure in tape running, deterioration of tape, decreased in head output, failure
in head amplifier, improper drum shield, etc.
<How to read a VIDEO error rate>
An average error rate on 64-track AUDIO+VIDEO sector is indi-
cated in exponential representation.
Example) ‘15’ is indicated:
Error rate = 1 ×10 -5
<How to read an AUDIO error rate>
To read error rate of AUDIO track, follow the procedures in the
table below.
The number of erroneous sync block of 64-track AUDIO sync
blocks is indicated in two hexadecimal digits.
(FF limitation is imposed on a value exceeding 255.)
Example) ‘23’is indicated:
Number of erroneous sync blocks = 35
Important
After the adjustment, set the DT to the product setting . (press STORE key at 1 of STEP 1 state.)
Fig. 3-4
Low ch. High ch.
EO 1 5 E1
1 × 10-5
Fig. 3-5
Low ch. High ch.
(hexadecimal)
(decimal)
AO 2 3 A1
2
(2 ×16)+ 3 = 35
3
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
ERROR RATE PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make setting shown at right. 6 4 WR --1D 00 Product setting
2) Set DT to 03. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ 03 Audio error rate indication
Reference) Product setting can be selected by resetting DT to 00. Thus, the Audio+Video error rate is indicated.
In the product specifications, the error rate on both chan-
nels in self -recording LP playback is as follows :
Error rate =28H or less
(Number of erroneous sync blocks = 40 or less)
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACAHPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS
3-6
5-2 Mechanical Error Indications
<Generals>
(1) When the camcorder is stopped upon detection of a mechanical error, the POWER LED indicator blinks and the message “EJECT
CASSETTE”appears on screen. At this step, the error condition can be checked in the service mode.
(2) A mechanical error indication is given in either one of the following two manners: indication of data held only by the main battery,
and indication of data backed up by the Lithium 3V. Referring to the table shown below, select an indication mode.
(3) Data backed up by the Lithium 3V can be reset at step 3.
<Indication of error data held only by the main battery>
<Indication of error data backed up by Lithium 3V>
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
MECH. ERROR PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make setting shown at right. 7 2 RD --01 -- Error data held only in the POWER-ON
state is indicated.
2 1) Make setting shown at right. 7 2 RD --02 -- Error data backed up by the EEPROM is
indicated.
3 1) Make setting shown at right. 7 2 WR --02 00
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * Completion of backup data resetting
Fig. 3-6
: T A P E E N D: T A P E T O P: D R U M E R R O R: C A P S T A N E R R O R: S - R E E L E R R O R: T - R E E L E R R O R: L O A D I N G M T R E R R O R: D E W E R R O R
PG BK MD
7 2 RD
ADDR
- - 0 1
D
CD
-
T
-
S
S T
E B T L D
EBD
D
CSTL
Relevant error indicat ion is highl ighted.
Fig. 3-7
: D R U M E R R O R: C A P S T A N E R R O R: S - R E E L E R R O R: T - R E E L E R R O R: L O A D I N G M T R E R R O R: D E W E R R O R
PG BK MD
7 2 RD
ADDR
- - 0 2
D
CD
-
T
-
S
S T
T L D
D
D
CSTL
Relevant error indicat ion is highl ighted.
* *
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACAHPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS
3-7
5-3 Camera Special Commands
<Generals>
(1) The camera special commands are available for operation check.
(2) Referring to the table shown below, make preparation, and then use any camera special commands as required.
(3) All the settings are reset when the STORE key is pressed in the “WR”mode at a relevant item.
Also, all commands are reset by turning the power off and on again.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
CAM SPECIAL COMMAND PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
Preparation 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 3 WR **00 33 WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Completion of high address "33" setting
WB SET 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3300 -- WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK WB is set.
WB LOCK 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3301 -- WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK WB is locked.
WB TURBO 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3302 -- WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK WB high-speed setting mode
WB 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3303 -- WAIT
OUTDOOR 2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK Outdoor white balance mode
WB INDOOR 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3304 -- WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK Indoor white balance mode
IRIS OPEN 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3305 -- WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK The iris is opened forcibly.
IRIS CLOSE 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3306 -- WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK The iris is closed forcibly.
AGC MAX 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3307 -- WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK A value of AGC gain is maximized.
AGC MIN 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3308 -- WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK A value of AGC gain is minimized.
COLOR BAR 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3309 -- WAIT Output a color bar signal for DIC output.
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK
White 100% 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 330A -- WAIT Output a white 100% signal for FIC output.
(DIC) 2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK
White 50% 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 330B -- WAIT Output a white 50% signal for DIC output.
(DIC) 2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK
White, arbitrary 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 330C -- WAIT
(DIC) 2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK DIC output, white
(By charging the DT of
"PG : 5, BK : 0, AD : 2822",
the brightness can be changed arbitrary.
White 100% 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 330D -- WAIT Output a white 100% signal for FIC output.
(FIC) 2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK
White 50% 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 330E -- WAIT Output a white 50% signal for FIC output.
(FIC) 2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK
White, arbitrary 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 330F -- WAIT
(FIC) 2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ -- OK FIC output, white
(By charging the DT of
"PG : 5, BK : 0, AD : 2822",
the brightness can be changed arbitrary.
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACAHPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS
3-8
5-4 Checking the Lens Resetting
<Generals>
(1) Setting the address according to the table below allows to check whether the lens resetting is ended or not.
(2) The 1st digit of binary number indication (Fig. 3-3 9 ) of data is for zoom, and the 2nd for focus resetting. Resetting is ended if 1
is indicated.
5-5 Functional Check of Control Keys and Switches
<Generals>
(1) In the service mode, the terminals of the MAIN and SUB microcomputer can be checked. Thereby, it is allowed to check key-
related operations and key-microcomputer connections in the product state.
(2) The addresses of the microcomputer terminals for checking are indicated in the “Remarks” column in the I/O port table (p. 2-14 to
p. 2-21). Note that since serial communication data signals are not synchronous with the LANC communication cycle (field) in the
service mode, operations related to these signals are not indicated accurately. So, use indications for these signals just as reference
data.
(3) The following explanations are provided for the data content which seem rather complicated. For other than below, use the
addresses shown in the “Remarks” column of the I/O port table.
(4) When carrying out functional checks, select the RD mode.
5-5-1 Voltage Range for A/D Input Key
(1) On the MAIN and SUB microcomputers, the terminals shown in Fig. 3-8 are A/D input ports. Key and/or mode is detected by
means of the A/D-converted voltage.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
LENS RESET PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
PREPARATION 1) Make setting shown at right. 5 1 WR **00 31 WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Completion of high address"31" setting
LENS RESET Set to status shown on right and 5 0 RD 313F -- WAIT
check the binary number
indication data.
Fig. 3-8
Pin No.MI-COM
193MAIN
MAIN
MAIN
MAIN
MAIN
MAIN
SUB
SUB
183
184
185
186
187
42
41
NAME PG
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
BK
MSW AD
DEW DET
KEY A/D 0
KEY A/D 1
KEY A/D 2
KEY A/D 3
BATT A/D
BATT. INFO A/D
ADDR
CA
C0
C1
C2
C3
C4
F1
F0
A/D DATA(00~FF)
(00~36)LOAD1
(00~33)Without battery
(34~65)--
(66~99)BP-422
(9A~FF)BP-406
(37~64)STBY
(65~87)POP UP
(88~A2)PLAY
(00~2C)STOP
(2D~67)REW
(68~A7)REC PAUSE
(A8~FF)--
(A3~BA)STOP
(BB~E3)LOAD2
(E4~FF)GAP
FF
MENU
EXECUTE
DE.ON/OFF
EXP
-- --
FOCOS
(00~12)DEW RELEASE
(16~FF)DEW DET
PLAY --
--
Voltage of main power supply
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACAHPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS
3-9
6. Service Hints
6-1 Arrangement of Circuit Boards
The printed circuit boards are arranged as shown below.
6-2 Current Consumption Check
The following table shows the specified value of current consumption in each status.
Measurement condition : Product status, camera auto mode(AF,IS OFF), LCD ON (0.1A each smaller in case of CVF)
Preset voltage : 7.4V
* : MC model only
POWER SW MODE Current Consumption (A) POWER SW MODE Current Consumption (A)
CAMERA REC PAUSE 0.65 VTR STILL 0.50
REC 0.72 FF/REW 0.70
STOP 0.63 CUE/REV 0.61
VTR STOP 0.46 CARD REC * 0.70
PLAY 0.57 CARD PLAY * 0.47
Fig.3-9
CA P.C.B.
CVF P.C.B.CCD P.C.B.
ZOOM SW UNIT
LCD P.C.B.
R-KEY UNIT
MULTI P.C.B.MAIN P.C.B.
AUDIO P.C.B.
SUB P.C.B.
MMC P.C.B.
LITHIUM P.C.B.
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACAHPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS
3-10
7. Trouble ShootingTo detect the failure part for repair, if any, use the following hints and check points.
7-1 Power Supply
<Hints>
When the power source is attached, the unit enters the standby mode in the following sequences.
Power source inserted→ POWER UNREG is supplied to MAIN P.C.B. → SUB microcomputer is activated.→ SUB microcomputer
activates recorder power supply.→SUB microcomputer communicates with MAIN microcomputer.→MAIN microcomputer initializes
the mechanisms.→After initialization, SUB microcomputer turns OFF recorder power supply.→ Standby mode is set.
Then, the power is turned on in the following sequences.
Power mode switch operated → After received at SUB microcomputer, VTR or CAM ON “H” signal is output. → PWM driver is
activated to turn on each power supply. → Each microcomputer (SUB, MAIN, CAMERA) is started up to carry out system control.
<Check Points>
1) Key Inputs
Check the key inputs at Power Switch in the SERVICE mode.
2) Check of microcomputer-to-microcomputer communication
If the microcomputer-to-microcomputer communication line is normal, the version number of each microcomputer can be indi-
cated in the service mode. Otherwise, the communication line or microcomputer may be faulty.
3) Error in Mechanism (P. 3-6)
If any error is occurred by mechanism trouble at initializing, the error can be detected.
At this state, the power can be turned on, but the unit enters “ERROR STOP” state. In this case, check the error data in the
SERVICE mode.
4) VTR ON “H” (control signal from SUB microcomputer) Outputs
Check the output of control signal by the LANC remote controller.
5) Fuses on the POWER SUPPLY P.C.B.
Check the continuations of fuses FU 3201,3202 on MAIN P.C.B. If any fuse is faulty, replace it and check the current consump-
tion.
6) Replace the MAIN P.C.B. with a service part and check the operation.
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACAHPTER 3. INFORMATION FOR REPAIR · SERVICE HINTS
3-11
7-2 Camera Picture Faulty
<Hints>
A flow of camera picture (EE) is as below.
CCD → CA P.C.B. → MAIN P.C.B. (DIC4 → SIC → VIC2→VIF2) → JACK P.C.B.
<Check Points>
1) Lens Resetting (P. 3-8)
If the camera picture is not displayed, check it in the service mode. If NG, check the lens.
2) Blue Back Output
In the VCR mode, the blue-back signal is generated by the VIC2 mounted on the MAIN P.C.B. Therefore, if its normal output can
be confirmed, it can be judged that the signal line subsequent to the VIC2 are normal.
3) Check of white 100% or color bar (DIC 4) output (P. 3-7)
The white 100% or color bar (DIC 4) signal is generated by the DIC4 mounted on the MAIN P.C.B. In the service mode, check
whether the white 100% or corol bar signal is generated normally or not. If its output is normal, the signal line subsequent to the
DIC4 would be normal.
4) CCD Output
The CCD output signal is sampled by the CDS/AGC/AD IC. Check this signal condition.
5) Camera Special Command (P. 3-7)
Check the operations of White Balance, AGC, IRIS, etc. in the SERVICE mode.
7-3 Faulty of Playback Picture
<Hints>
In DV format, the deterioration of picture quality appears on the screen as a block noise. This failure is occurred when the picture
information (in block unit) exceeds a limit of processing performance of error correction and the previous picture information is used
for compensation.
Normally, if an error rate is worsened considerably by the deterioration of tape quality or head output, the symptom appears.
For this reason, when you check the playback picture, check the error rate. To evaluate the error rate at an absolute value, use several
kinds of tapes.
<Check Points>
1) Deterioration of Tape Quality
Check if flaws, kinks, etc. are found on a magnetic face of tape or not, and compare it with the error rate of other unit.
2) Error Rate (P. 3-5)
Check an error rate of self-recording LP playbacked picture in the SERVICE mode.
If the result is “NG” check the following points.
3) Head Output (See the DMC II Service Manual.)
Referring to a service manual of DMC II, check the RF output level and linearity. (including a cleaning of head)
The relation between the RF envelope and the faulty symptom is as below.
· Lack of output at inlet side : abnormal sound, left part of screen has a block noise.
· Lack of output at outlet side : abnormal time code, etc., right part of screen has a block noise.
4) EQ Automatic Adjustment (P. 4-36)
Referring to the adjustment procedures, perform the EQ automatic adjustment. By this adjustment, the Playback Amplifier circuit
in theVRP2 (on the MAIN P.C.B.) and the playback RF output are matched so that the error rate is minimized automatically.
CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
CONTENTS
1. Disassembling and Reassembling ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-1
1-1 Disassembling / Reassembling Flowchart ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-1
1-2 Separation of Finder Unit &Rear Cover ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-2
1-3 Separation of Top Cover, Mic Cover and Zoom Key Unit ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-3
1-4 Separation of LCD Holder Cover, Front Cover Unit and Remote Control Window Cover -------------------------------- 4-4
1-5 Separation of Left Cover Unit ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-5
1-6 Separation of Right Cover Unit ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-6
1-7 Separation of CVF Unit, Lens Ring Unit and CA P.C.B. ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-7
1-8 Separation of Jack Unit, Multi P.C.B., Main P.C.B., Audio P.C.B. and Mic Unit -------------------------------------------- 4-8
1-9 Separation of Lens Unit, SUB P.C.B. and Recorder Holder -------------------------------------------------------------------- 4-9
1-10 Disassembly of Left Cover Unit 1 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-10
1-11 Disassembly of Left Cover Unit 2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 4-11
1-12 Disassembly of Left Cover Unit 3 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-12
1-13 Disassembly of Left Cover Unit 4 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-13
1-14 Disassembly of Right Cover Unit 1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-14
1-15 Disassembly of Right Cover Unit 2 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-15
1-16 Disassembly of LCD Unit 1 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-16
1-17 Disassembly of LCD Unit 2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-17
1-18 Disassembly of LCD Unit 3 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-18
1-19 Disassembly of LCD Unit 4 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-19
1-20 Disassembly of CVF Unit ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-20
1-21 Disassembly of Lens Unit 1 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-21
1-22 Disassembly of Lens Unit 2 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-22
1-23 List of Screws Used ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-23
1-24 List of Disassembly Photos -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-24
2. Adjustment Procedures ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-26
2-1 Adjustment Items in Part Replacement --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-26
2-2 AF Section Adjustment --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-27
2-2-1 CZ Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-27
2-2-2 Zoom Performance Check -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-27
2-3 IS Section Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-28
2-3-1 GYRO OFFSET Adjustment --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-28
2-3-2 GYRO GAIN Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-28
2-3-3 EEPROM Writing ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-28
2-4 Camera Section Adjustment --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-29
2-4-1 Iris Encoder Adjustment --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-29
2-4-2 WB Adjustment (1) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-29
2-4-3 Color Balance Adjustment -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-30
2-4-4 WB Adjustment (2) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-30
2-4-5 WB Adjustment (3) -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-30
2-4-6 EEPROM Writing ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-30
2-5 CCD Pixel Missing Compensation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-31
2-5-1 CCD Void Pixel Correction (Automatic) ------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-31
2-5-2 CCD Void Pixel Correction (Manual) ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-32
2-6 Recorder Section Adjustment -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-34
2-6-1 Recorder Setting for Destination ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-34
2-6-2 Y LEVEL Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-34
2-6-3 C LEVEL Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-35
2-6-4 AGC Initial Value Adjustment -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-35
2-6-5 SWP Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-36
2-6-6 C. FG Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-36
2-6-7 EQ Adjustment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-36
2-6-8 Battery Voltage Drop Adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-37
2-7 Tape Path Adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------4-37
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-1
START
1-2 Finder Unit
1-2 Rear Cover
1-5 Left Cover Unit 1-12 MMC P.C.B.
1-20 CVF P.C.B.
1-21 CCD P.C.B.
1-21 CCD Unit
1-7 CA P.C.B
1-8 Jack Unit
1-7 CVF Unit
1-3 Top Cover
1-3 Mic Cover
1-4 Remocon Window Cover
1-7 Lens Ring Unit
1-3 Zoom Key Unit
1-4 Front Cover Unit
1-4 LCD Holder Cover
1-6 Right Cover Unit
1-14 Battery Terminal Unit
1-15 Recorder Key Unit
1-14 LCD Unit
1-12 Main Dial Unit
1-8 Main P.C.B.
1-8 Multi P.C.B.
1-8 Audio P.C.B.
1-8 Mic Unit
1-9 Lens Unit
1-9 Recorder Holder
1-9 SUB P.C.B.
: MAIN FLOW
: SUB FLOW
: MAIN UNIT
1. Disassembling and Reassembling
Notes :
(1) When replacing the flat cable with a new one, allow it to remain folded the same as the original part.
(2) The flat cable has a contact orientation to be engaged with the connector. Refer to the instructions in the disassembly procedure
diagram and interconnection diagram for boards.
⋅ Lateral engaging connector
(The instructions are given in the disassembly procedure diagram and board interconnection diagram.)
: Contacts are positioned downward. (board side)
∗ : Contacts are positioned upward.
⋅ Lengthwise engaging connector
(The instructions are given only in the boards interconnection diagram.)
Indicated by →. Arrowheads indicate the contacts, and the shafts indicate the noncontacts.
(3) To secure screws, apply the Three Bond 1401B (CY9-8012-000)
1-1 Disassembling / Reassembling Flowchart
(1) Find the replacement part on the chart, and disassemble it following the instruction on chart.
(2) Reassembling can be made by reversing the disassembling procedures.
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-2
1-2 Separation of Finder Unit &Rear Cover
(1) Push the Lever and detach the Finder Unit.
(2) Open the LCD Unit and Cassette Cover.
(3) Remove five screws (a × 2, b × 1, c × 1, d × 1) and detach the Rear Cover.
(4) Separate the AV cover from the Rear Cover.
< Instruction for Supply >
Finder section : Hanal FL778 (DY9-3026-000)
Shaft and spring parts: Hanal FL778 (DY9-3026-000)
Fig. 4-1
SilverPainted
M1.7
3mm
b
MetalM1.7
3.5mm
d
5.5mm
c
SilverPainted
M1.7(self tap)
3mm
a
SilverPainted
M1.7
HanalFL-778
(3)
LeverAV Cover
Cassette Cover
LCD Unit
Finder Unit
Rear Cover
Hanal FL-778(Shaft and Spring)
(3) - a
(3) - a
(3) - c(3) - b
(3) - d
(4)
(2)
(2)
(1)
(1)
Grease applying Position
Grease applying Position
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-3
1-3 Separation of Top Cover, Mic Cover and Zoom Key Unit
(1) Remove two screws (b × 1, e × 1).
(2) Detach the Top Cover, Mic Cover and Mic Sheet.
(3) Remove CN1401 and two screws (f × 2), then detach the Zoom Key Unit.
Fig. 4-2
(2)
(2)
SilverPainted
M1.7
3mm
b
MetalM1.4
2mm
f
2.5mm
e
SilverPainted
M1.7
CN1401
Top Cover
Zoom Key Unit
Mic Cover
Mic Sheet
(1) - b
(1) - e
(3) - f
(3)
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-4
1-4 Separation of LCD Holder Cover, Front Cover Unit and Remote Control Window Cover
(1) Remove two screws (g × 2), and detach the upper and lower LCD Holder Covers and Front Cover Unit. Since the magnets are
attached to the LCD Holder Covers, be careful about the polarity when reassembling.
(2) Remove the Remote Control Window Cover.
< Note on Reassembling >
(1) When attaching the magnets on the LCD Holder Covers with an adhesive, face the red-painted sides (N) down.
< Instruction for Supply >
Adhesion of magnet : DIA BOND No. 1663 (DY9-3009-000)
Fig. 4-3
Note on Reassembling (1)
(2)
(1)
(1)
Bond applying Position
g
4mm
SilverPainted
M1.7(self tap)
(1) - g
Remote Control Window Cover
LCD Holder Cover
LCD Holder Cover
Front Cover Unit
Magnets(Face down the red-painted sides)
LCD Holder Covers
DIA BOND No,1663
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-5
1-5 Separation of Left Cover Unit
(1) Detach the Hand Strap.
(2) Remove four screws (d × 1, j × 1, k × 2).
(3) Detach CN200, and with the Cassette Cover opened, remove the Left Cover Unit.
Fig. 4-4
Cassette Cover
Left Cover Unit
Hand Strap
CN200
MetalM1.7
3.5mm
d
3.5mm
j
BlackM1.7
(self tap)
4mm
k
MetalM1.7
(2) - d
(2) - k
(2) - k
(2) - j
(3)
(3)
(3)
(1)
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-6
1-6 Separation of Right Cover Unit
(1) Rotate the LCD Unit and detach seven screws (i × 4, l × 3).
(2) Detach connectors CN102, CN1502 and CN3201, then remove the Right Cover Unit.
< Note on Reassembling >
(1) Secure three screws (i) in order.
(2) Be careful when wiring the FPC of CN102.
Fig. 4-5
Note on Reassembling (2)Note on Reassembling (1)
(1)
CN1502
CN102
CN102
CN3201
Right Cover Unit
LCD Unit
Rest of FPC should be inserted between the metal plate and the P.C.B., and not under the rubber part.
Screw tightening order
2.5mm
i
MetalM1.7
MetalM1.7
3mm
l
(1) - i
(1) - i
(1) - i
(1) - i
(1) - l
(1) - l
(1) - l
UL Tape(2)
(2)
(2)
No.1
No.2
No.3
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-7
1-7 Separation of CVF Unit, Lens Ring Unit and CA P.C.B.
(1) Peel off the cushions, let the Mic Unit float above the CVF Unit, then remove two screws (h × 1, m × 1) and CN1501, and detach
the CVF Unit.
(2) Detach two screws (n × 2) and remove the Lens Ring Unit.
(3) Remove CN1402, and while detaching CN1000 and CN1001 (B to B), remove the CA P.C.B.
< Note on Reassembling >
(1) Be sure to attach the Cushions on the specified positions.
Fig. 4-6
Note on Reassembling (1)
(2)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
2.5mm
h
MetalM1.7
MetalM1.4
4.5mm
m
BlackM1.4
1.3mm
n
Lens Ring Unit
Mic Unit
CVF Unit
Cushion
Cushion Cushion
Align with the ridge line.
Left reference
Align the corners. (adjust so that upper end of cushion falls into the space, and is not placed on the CVF plate).
Fold the surplus part toward the inside.
Align the lower end with the lower edge of metallic plate of the lens.
Cushion
CN1501
CN1001(B to B)
CN1000(B to B)
CN1402
CA P.C.B.
(1) - h
(2) - n
(2) - n
(1) - m
(3)
(3)
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-8
1-8 Separation of Jack Unit, Multi P.C.B., Main P.C.B., Audio P.C.B. and Mic Unit
(1) Detach two screws (h × 2) and CN3302 and CN93, then detach the Jack Unit.
(2) Detach two screws (h × 1, i × 1) and CN92, then remove the Multi P.C.B.
(3) Remove three screws (h × 3) and CN304, CN1301 (B to B), CN2000 and UL tape, and detach the Main P.C.B, Audio P.C.B. and
Mic Unit together.
(4) Remove CN601 and CN3301 (B to B), and separate the Audio P.C.B. and Mic Unit from the Main P.C.B.
Fig. 4-7
(4)
(2)
(2)
Audio P.C.B.Audio P.C.B.
UL Tape
UL Tape
Mic Unit
Main P.C.B.
Main P.C.B.
Multi P.C.B.
Jack Unit
CN3302
CN3301(B to B)
CN601(B to B)
CN1301 (B to B)
CN2000 CN92
CN304
CN93
2.5mm
(3) - h
(3) - h (2) - h (1) - h
(1) - h
(3) - h
(2) - i(3)
(3)
(3)(3)
(1)
(1)
(1)
MetalM1.7
MetalM1.7
h2.5mm
i
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-9
1-9 Separation of Lens Unit, SUB P.C.B. and Recorder Holder(1) Detach two screws (m × 2) then remove the Lens Unit and Lens Sheet.
(2) Detach two screws (h × 2) and CN300, CN301, CN302, CN303, and remove the SUB P.C.B.
(3) Detach three screws (p × 2, q × 1) and the Spring, then remove the Recorder Holder.
Note : Be sure to face downward the cassette compartment side of the DMCII mechanism unit, from which the
recorder holder has been detached. (Facing the gear at the rear of main chassis downward may result in
damage to it.)
< Note on Reassembling >
(1) When attaching the Recorder Holder, note that there should be Rubber pieces at five locations.
(2) Before using the Insulation Rubber of service parts, coat the entire surface with Hanal KS-50M (DY9-3047-000).
Fig. 4-8
Note on Reassembling (1)
(3)
(1)
Lens Unit
Recorder Holder
UL TapeUL Tape
UL TapeLens Sheet
Rubber
SpringSUB P.C.B.
SUB P.C.B.
Rubber
Rubber
Rubber
CN301
CN300
CN303
CN302
Set the side of cassette compartment downward.
2.5mm
h
MetalM1.7
MetalM1.4
4.5mm
m
MetalM1.4
3.5mm
p
MetalM1.4
3mm
q
(2) - h
(2) - h
(1) - m
(1) - m
(3) - q
(3) - p
(3) - p
(2)
(2)
(2)
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-10
1-10 Disassembly of Left Cover Unit 1(1) Open the MMC Cover, detach four screws (i × 1, r × 1, s × 2) and remove the C Cover.
(2) Remove one screw (t × 1) then detach Spring Plate, Dial Plate and Switch Knob.
(3) Remove two screws (d × 1, u × 1) and detach MMC Cover Unit. (ELURA20 MC A) or SD Cover Holder (ELURA10 A)
< Note on Reassembling >
(1) Secure the screws of C Cover in order.
< Instruction for Supply >
Spring Plate : Hanal KS-50
Fig. 4-9
Grease applying Position
Note on Reassembling (1)
(3)
(3)
(2)
(2)
(1)
Spring Plate
Dial Plate
C Cover
(ELURA20 MC A)
Switch KnobMMC CoverUnit
(ELURA10 A)
SD CoverHolder
Double-side adhesive tape
No.1No.1
No.2
No.3Screw tighteningOrder
Hanal KS-50
2.8mm
t
MetalM1.4
(self tap)
MetalM1.7
3mm
s
MetalM1.7
1.8mm
r
MetalM1.7
3.5mm
d2.5mm
i
MetalM1.7
2mm
u
MetalM1.7
(3) - d
(3) - d
(1) - i
(1) - r
(1) - s
(2) - t
(3) - u
(3) - u
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-11
1-11 Disassembly of Left Cover Unit 2(1) Remove the Hand Strap.
(2) Detach six screws (u × 2, v × 1, w × 1, h × 2) and CN14, then remove the Cassette Rear Cover.
Fig. 4-10
Cassette Rear Cover
Hand Strap
CN14
(2) - h
(2) - u
(2) - v
(2) - w
2.5mm
h
MetalM1.7
2mm
u
MetalM1.7
MetalM1.7
6mm
v
MetalM1.7
(self tap)
3.5mm
w
(2)
(2)
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-12
1-12 Disassembly of Left Cover Unit 3(1) Detach CN11, CN13, CN15 and then MMC P.C.B.
(2) Detach one screw (h × 1) and then the Main Dial Unit.
< Note on Reassembling >
(1) The speaker wiring at the rear of Main Dial Unit should be run through the A part (in Fig. 4-11) for connection.
Fig. 4-11
(2)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
2.5mm
h
MetalM1.7
Main Dial Unit
MMC P.C.B.
CN11
CN13
CN15
A
(2) - h
Note on Reassembling (1)
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-13
1-13 Disassembly of Left Cover Unit 4(1) Peel off the Caution Seal, remove five screws (i × 1, l × 2, r × 1, C × 1), and separate the Left Cover and Cassette Arm Unit.
< Note on Reassembling >
(1) Fold the FPC as shown in the figure when connecting it.
< Instruction for Supply >
Arm guide assembly in Cassette Arm Unit : FLOIL C-1Z
Fig. 4-12
Note on Reassembling (1)
Grease applying Position
Cassette Arm Unit
Left Cover
Caution Seal
Floil C-1Z
Cassette Arm Guide
MetalM1.7
1.8mm
r2.5mm
i
MetalM1.7
MetalM1.7
3mm
l
MetalM1.7
3mm
C
(1) - i
(1) - l
(1) - l
(1) - r
(1) - C
(1)
(1)
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-14
1-14 Disassembly of Right Cover Unit 1
(1) Remove two screws (x × 2) and detach the LCD Unit.
(2) Remove two screws (l × 2) and detach the Battery Terminal Unit.
(3) Remove one screw (y × 1) and detach the Tripod Plate.
< Note on Reassembling >
(1) Set the distance between the shadowed part of LCD-MAIN FPC and the step part of the Right Cover at 1mm as in the figure. Then
secure them with the UL tape.
Fig. 4-13
(3)
(2)
(1)
Tripod Plate
UL Tape
Rear side of right cover
Battery Terminal Unit
LCD Unit
Right Cover
MetalM1.7
3mm
l
MetalM2.0
4.5mm
x
4.5mm
y
MetalM1.7
(self tap)
(2) - l
(1) - x
(3) - y(1) - x
LCD-MAINFPC
1mm
Note on Reassembling (1)
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-15
1-15 Disassembly of Right Cover Unit 2
(1) Separate the Recorder Key Unit from the Right Cover.
Note : The Recorder Unit is held in place by double-side adhesive tape. So, push it through the hole in the rear of
Right Cover by a thin stick so it is raised, and then pulled slowly to separate it.
Also, be careful not to damage the FPC when pulling it through the hole in Right Cover.
Fig. 4-14
CAUTION
(1) Recorder Key Unit
Right Cover
Hole
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-16
1-16 Disassembly of LCD Unit 1
(1) Remove five screws (e × 5) then detach the LCD Top Cover while being careful with the Claw A.
< Note on Reassembling >
(1) LCD Top Cover should be assembled after inserting the Claw A.
Fig. 4-15
(1)
e
SilverPainted
M1.7
2.5mm
Claw A
LCD Top Cover
(1) - e
(1) - e
(1) - e
Note on Reassembling (1)
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-17
1-17 Disassembly of LCD Unit 2
(2) Remove CN901, CN902, CN903, unsolder at two places (B), and remove two screws (h × 2) to detach the LCD P.C.B., LCD
Shield the Back Light Unit and LCD Panel.
< Note on Reassembling >
(1) Cover the element on the LCD P.C.B. with UL tape. Note, however, that UL tape should be attached so taht it will not protrube
from the LCD P.C.B.
(2) Mount the LCD P.C.B., LCD Shield and the Backlight Unit as in the Fig.4-16.
Fig. 4-16
Note on Reassembling (2)
Note on Reassembling (1)
(1)
(1)
(1) - h
(1) - h
UL Tape
Be sure to cover this element without fail.
Attach UL tape so that it will not protrudebeyond the side edge of the PCB.
LCD P.C.B.
LCD Shield
BackLight Unit
1 : Pass the Back Light Wire through the hole in LCD P.C.B.
2 : Bend the Back Light wire, solder it,and fold the LCDshield through 180 along the edge of the LCD P.C.B.
Before passing the wire through the hole, fit the protrusion at the perforations in the LCD P.C.B. unit into the hole of the Back Light Unit.
Bending direction
Solder here.
Bending direction
LCD Panel
CN901CN902
CN903
IC902
T4201
CN901 CN902 CN903
IC902
T4201
CN901 CN902
CN903
(1) - B
(1) - B
h
MetalM1.7
2.5mm
LCDShield
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-18
1-18 Disassembly of LCD Unit 3
(1) Remove one screw (j × 1) to detach the LCD Lock Switch.
(2) Separate one screw (h × 1), LCD Hinge Unit and LCD SW FPC.
(3) Remove two screws (D × 2), peel off the Magnet sheet and detach the Hinge Covers L,R.
< Note on Reassembling >
(1) The magnet has polarities.
Fig. 4-17
Note on Reassembling (1)
(3)
(3)
(2)
(1)
(1)LCD Lock Switch
Hinge Cover R
Hinge Cover R
LCD Hinge Unit
Magnet Sheet
Hinge Cover L
Hinge Cover L
The side with red paint (N) should face upward.
LCD SW FPC
Magnet
2.5mm
(2) - h
(1) - j
(3) - D
h
MetalM1.7
3.5mm
j
BlackM1.7
(self tap)
4mm
D
BlackM1.7
(self tap)
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-19
1-19 Disassembly of LCD Unit 4
(1) Remove the LCD FPC sheet and the LCD FPC from the Hinge unit.
< Note on Reassembling >
(1) Before using the LCD FPC of service part, cut the part of it as indicated in the figure.
Then, align the positions “1” with “2”, “3” with “4” respectively, and then fix them with the Kapton tape (DY9-3052-000) so that
it covers the LCD FPC.
(2) After wiring the LCD FPC around the Hinge Unit, be sure to wrap it with the LCD FPC Sheet before assembling.
< Instruction for Supply >
LCD FPC, LCD FPC Sheet : Hanal FL778
Kapton Tape : Tape, Kapton DY9-3052-000
Fig. 4-18
LCD Hinge Unit
LCD FPC
LCD FPCSheet
HanalFL778
LCD FPC
Align outside, andattach tape securely.
Align outside, andattach tape securely.
Kapton Tape
Kapton Tape
Note on Reassembling (1)
1
2
3
4
1~2mm
1~2mm
15mm
9mm
15mm
9mm(1)
(1)
Grease applying Position
KaptonTape
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-20
1-20 Disassembly of CVF Unit
(1) Detach two screws (z × 1, A × 1), CN4102 and the Rubber, then remove the CVF Plate, CVF P.C.B. and the Cushion.
(2) Unsolder part B and remove the Back Light Unit.
(3) Detach the LCD Stopper, CVF Panel and Mask.
Note : Detach the LCD Stopper while being careful about the four claws.
(4) Remove the Clamp Washer, Finder Lever and Spring.
Fig. 4-19
(4)
(3)
(2)
(2)
(1)(1)
(1)Rubber
Back Light Unit
Spring
Clamp WasherFinder Lever
Cushion
Mask
Claws
CVF Panel
LCD Stopper
Back Light Unit
UL Tape
CVF P.C.B.
CVF Plate
(2)-B (Solder here)
CVF P.C.B.
CN4102
(1) - z
(1) - A
3.5mm
A
MetalM1.7
(self tap)
3mm
z
BlackM1.7
(self tap)
Claws
CAUTION
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-21
1-21 Disassembly of Lens Unit 1
(1) Detach the Lens Rubber Ring.
(2) Remove two screws (o × 2), CCD Unit, CCD P.C.B., CCD Graphite, CCD Rubber and IR Filter.
< Note on Reassembling >
(1) Align the CCD Graphite with the edges of CCD P.C.B. and squeeze in so that it contacts the legs of CCD.
(2) Be sure to attach the washer between the CCD P.C.B. and the CCD Unit.
Fig. 4-20
(2)
(1)
Lens Rubber Ring
CCD Unit
CCD P.C.B.
CCD Rubber
CCD Graphite
IR FilterLens Unit
CCD Graphite
CCD P.C.B.
Align with edgesof CA P.C.B.
Bring incontact withlegs of CCD.
Evaporated surface (side that appears reddish when exposed to light)
CCD
LENS
Metal Washer
Poly Washer
(2) - o
6mm
o
BlackM1.7
(self tap)
IR FilterNote on Reassembling (1)
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-22
1-22 Disassembly of Lens Unit 2
(3) Remove five screws (B × 5), IG meter, and AF/PZ Motor. (Unsolder parts to be replaced (α).)
< Instruction for Supply >
AF/PZ motor shaft: LOGENEST LAMBDA A-74 (CY9-8102-000)
Fig. 4-21
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
Grease applying Position
IG Meter
AF Motor
PZ Motor
Lens Unit
(1)-α(1)-α
4mm
B
MetalM1.7
(self tap)
(1) - B
(1) - B
(1) - B
(1) - B
(1) - BLogenest Lambda A-74
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-23
1-23 List of Screws Used
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
DA2-1455-000
DA2-1017-000
DA2-1018-000
XA1-7170-357
DA2-1015-000
XA1-7140-207
DA2-1016-000
XA1-7170-257
XA9-1001-000
XA4-9170-359
XA1-7170-407
XA1-7170-307
XA9-1244-000
CB1-8698-000
XA4-9170-609
(Coated with XA1-7170-307)M1.7-3.0mm
(Coated with XA9-1002-000)M1.7-3.0mm
(Coated with XA4-5170-557)Self TapM1.7-5.5mm
M1.7-3.5mm (METAL)
(Coated with XA9-1001-000)M1.7-2.5mm
M1.4-2.0mm (METAL)
(Coated with XA4-9170-407)Self TapM1.7-4.0mm
M1.7-2.5mm (METAL)
M1.7-2.5mm (thin head)(METAL)
Self TapM1.7-3.5mm (BLACK)
M1.7-4.0mm (METAL)
M1.7-3.0mm (METAL)
Stepped ScrewM1.4-4.5mm (BLACK)
M1.4-1.3mm (BLACK)
Self TapM1.7-6.0mm (BLACK)
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
A
B
C
D
XA9-1167-000
XA9-1260-000
XA9-1000-000
XA9-1002-000
XA4-9140-287
XA1-7170-207
XA1-7170-607
XA9-1004-000
XA1-7200-457
XA4-9170-457
XA4-9170-309
XA4-9170-357
XA4-9170-407
XA9-1274-000
XA4-9170-409
Stepped ScrewM1.4-3.5mm (METAL)
Stepped ScrewM1.4-3.0mm (METAL)
M1.7-1.8mm (thin head) (METAL)
M1.7-3.0mm (thin head) (METAL)
Self TapM1.4-2.8mm (METAL)
M1.7-2.0mm (METAL)
M1.7-6.0mm (METAL)
Self TapM1.7-3.5mm (thin head)(METAL)
M2.0-4.5mm (METAL)
Self TapM1.7-4.5mm (METAL)
Self TapM1.7-3.0mm (BLACK)
Self TapM1.7-3.5mm (METAL)
Self TapM1.7-4.0mm (METAL)
M1.7-3.0mm (METAL)
Self TapM1.7-4.0mm (BLACK)
PARTS NO. REMARKS ILLUSTS
YM
BO
LREMARKS REMARKS ILLUST
SY
MB
OL
3mm
2.8mm
3.5mm
2mm
2.5mm
4mm
2.5mm
3.5mm
4mm
3mm
4.5mm
1.3mm
3mm
1.8mm
2mm
6mm
3mm
4.5mm
4.5mm
3.5mm
3mm
3.5mm
3mm
4mm
4mm
3mm
5.5mm
6mm
2.5mm3.5mm
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-24
1-24 List of Disassembly Photos
Right Cover Unit
Left Cover FPC
Left Side
Left Cover Unit
Separation of Top Cover
Camera Unit
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-25
MMC P.C.B.
Finder Unit
Camera / Recorder Unit
MAIN P.C.B. / AUDIO P.C.B.
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-26
2. Adjustment Procedures
2-1 Adjustment Items in Part Replacement
After replacement of major parts, carry out adjustment referring to the table shown below. Note that the following table shows mini-
mum required adjustments to be performed after replacing any major part. In case that two or more parts have been replaced or any
faulty condition has occurred, take a proper adjustment procedure accordingly.
: Adjustment required
Camera system
Part name
No. Adjustment itemLens
SUBPCB
CCDMAINPCB
Adjustment setting
2-2 AF section
2-2-1 CZ Adjustment Product condition
2-2-2 Zoom Performance Check Product condition
2-3 IS section
2-3-1 Gyro Offset Auto Adjustment Product condition
2-3-2 Gyro Gain Adjustment Product condition
2-3-3 EEPROM Writing Product condition
2-4 Camera section
2-4-1 Iris Encoder Adjustment Product condition
2-4-2 WB Adjustment (1) Product condition
2-4-3 Color Balance Adjustment Product condition
2-4-4 WB Adjustment (2) Product condition
2-4-5 WB Adjustment (3) Product condition
2-4-6 EEPROM Writing Product condition
2-5 CCD Pixel Missing Compensation Product condition
Recorder system
Part name
No. Adjustment item MAINPCB
DMCII
Adjustment setting
2-6 Recorder section
2-6-1 Recorder Setting for Destination Product condition
2-6-2, 2-6-3 Y LEVEL / C LEVEL Adjustment Product condition
2-6-4 AGC Initial Value Adjustment Product condition
2-6-5 SWP Adjustment Product condition
2-6-6 C. FG Adjustment Product condition
2-6-7 EQ Adjustment Product condition
2-6-8 Battery Voltage Drop Adjustment Product condition
DMC II
2-7 Tape Path Adjustment Tape path adjustment setting
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-27
2-2 AF Section Adjustment
Preparation)
1) For CZ adjustment/zoom performance check, set the product condition.2) Adjustment condition (initial condition)
Program AE : Auto ModeZOOM : Telephoto-endCZ adjustment chart : 2.4 ± 0.02 m from lens frontChart luminance : 500 lux or more (High illuminance should be avoided at the wide-angle end.)
2-2-1 CZ Adjustment
CHART CZ adjustment chart
SPEC. Automatic adjustment : At STEP 3, DT : AA should be attained and the specified zoom performance shall be satisfied.
Procedure)
(1) In the telephoto-end setting, bring the center of chart image to the center of monitor TV.(2) Referring to the table shown below, carry out CZ adjustment in the service mode.(3) Turn power OFF and then ON, and check the zoom performance.
2-2-2 Zoom Performance Check
CHART CZ adjustment chart
SPEC. “DT at address 30D2=”01" in steps (3),(4) below
Difference between “DTs at address 30D3” in steps (3),(4) below is within “±4 Hex”.
Procedure)
(1) In the telephoto-end setting, bring the center of chart image to the center of monitor TV, and set AF OFF.(2) Perform slow-speed zooming from the telephoto position to the wide-angle position. Make sure that defocusing does not occur.(3) At the wide-angle setting, read out data at the focus position according to the table below.(4) Turn AF ON, and read out data at the focus position as in (3) above.(5) Check whether or not the data read out in (3) and (4) satisfies the specification.(6) Turn power OFF and then ON. Carry out zooming several times reciprocally for a distant object and check that defocusing does
not occur. (AF ON)
(7) If the results of check at steps (2), (5) and (6) are OK, the adjustment is completed. If the results are NG, carry out CZ adjustment again.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operationCZ PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 1 WR **00 31 WAIT2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK High address "31'" is set up.
2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 0 WR 313A 90 WAIT2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Date setting for adjustment is completed.
3 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 3 WR **00 31 WAIT2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK High address "31'" is set up.
4 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3100 00 WAIT2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ 01~08 BUSY Automatic adjustment is started. Then, it is
completed in 30 seconds approximately.If any NG condition is encountered in automaticadjustment, check the parts inside the lens
5 Judgment on result of adjustment 5 2 RD 3100 AA OK Adjustment is completed (result is OK).Carry out the zoom performance check.
↑ ↑ RD ↑ FF NG Adjustment is completed (result is NG).Take the procedure again from the beginning.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation ZOOM CHECK PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 1 WR **00 30 WAIT2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK High address "30" is set up.
2 1) Read out data in the setting 5 0 RD 30D2 "--" WAIT Data at address 30D2 is indicated. shown at right. ↑ ↑ ↑ 30D3 "--" ↑ Data at address 30D3 is indicated.
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-28
2-3 IS Section Adjustment
Note)
1) Carry out the adjustment on a tripod or a vibration-free bench.
Preparation)
1) Carry out IS adjustment in a product status.
<Preparation for IS adjustment>
2-3-1 GYRO OFFSET Adjustment
SPEC. Automatic adjusutment
Procedure)
(1) Wait at least 10 seconds while being careful not to apply vibration to the camera.(2) Referring to the table shown below, perform the automatic adjustment.
2-3-2 GYRO GAIN Adjustment
SPEC. Date Writing
Procedure)
(1) Reset the data to be the original, referring to the table shown below.
2-3-3 EEPROM Writing
SPEC. Automatic writing
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, write the adjustment data (from 2-3-1 through 2) into EEPROM.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
IS ADJ MODE PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 3 WR **00 32 WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD **00 ↑ OK High address "32" is set up.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
GYRO OFFSET PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3206 00 WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Adjustment is completed.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
GYRO GAIN PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 Gyro YAW gain adjustment
1-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3200 66 WAIT
2) Press the STORE key ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Adjustment is completed.
2 Gyro PITCH gain adjustment
2-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3201 6F WAIT
2) Press the STORE key ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Adjustment is completed.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
EEPROM WRITING PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3208 00 WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Writing is completed.
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-29
2-4 Camera Section Adjustment
Notes)
1) Each adjustment data (2-4-1 to 2-4-5) becomes effective after it is written into the EEPROM as mentioned in 2-4-6. If power must
be turned OFF/ON during each adjustment, be sure to perform the EEPROM write procedure as mentioned in 2-4-6.
2) The adjustments from 2-4-2 through 2-4-5 must be carried out in series.
Preparation)
1) For camera section adjustment, take the product condition.
2) Adjustment condition (initial condition)
Program AE : Auto Mode
AF : OFF
Image stabilizer : OFF
Chart : Standard angle of view
<Preparation for camera adjustment>
(1) Referring to the table shown below, set the high address for camera adjustment mode.
2-4-1 Iris Encoder Adjustment
CHART Light box (5600°K)
SPEC. Automatic adjustment.
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, adjust the Iris Encoder.
2-4-2 WB Adjustment (1)
CHART Light box (5600°K)
SPEC. Automatic adjustment
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out WB adjustment (1).
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
CAM ADJ MODE PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 3 WR **00 30 WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK High address "30" is set up.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
IRIS ENC. PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3000 00 WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ WR ↑ ↑ BUSY Adjustment is in progress.
↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Adjustment is completed.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
WB (1) PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3002 00 WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ WR ↑ ↑ BUSY Adjustment is in progress.
↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Adjustment is completed.
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-30
2-4-3 Color Balance Adjustment
CHART Lightbox (5600°K), and color bar chart (white area at the left side)M.EQ. VectorscopeTP/TRIG. VIDEO OUTSPEC. R : × 2.0(ratio to burst)104°, Ye : × 1.4 (ratio to burst) 168°
Procedure)
(1) For manual adjustment of color balance, change data at the following four addresses while observing a vectorscope.
2-4-4 WB Adjustment (2)
CHART Light box (5600°K), and CCA12 filterSPEC. Automatic adjustment
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out WB adjustment (2).
2-4-5 WB Adjustment (3)
CHART Light box (5600°K)SPEC. Automatic adjustment
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out WB adjustment (3).
2-4-6 EEPROM Writing
SPEC. Automatic writing
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, write adjustment data (from 2-4-1 to 2-4-5) into the EEPROM.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation CB PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
R-Y GAIN 1) In the setting shown at right, adjust 5 2 WR 3007 "ADJ" WAIT Adjustment is in progress. relevant data.2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ADJ OK Adjustment is completed.
B-Y GAIN 1) In the setting shown at right, adjust 5 2 WR 3008 "ADJ" WAIT Adjustment is in progress. relevant data.2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ADJ OK Adjustment is completed.
R-Y MAT 1) In the setting shown at right, adjust 5 2 WR 3009 "ADJ" WAIT Adjustment is in progress. relevant data.2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ADJ OK Adjustment is completed.
B-Y MAT 1) In the setting shown at right, adjust 5 2 WR 300A "ADJ" WAIT Adjustment is in progress. relevant data.2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ADJ OK Adjustment is completed.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation WB (2) PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3004 00 WAIT2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ WR ↑ ↑ BUSY Adjustment is in progress.
↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Adjustment is completed.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation WB (3) PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3005 00 WAIT2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ WR ↑ ↑ BUSY Adjustment is in progress.
↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Adjustment is completed.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation EEPROM WRITING PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 3006 00 WAIT2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Writing is completed.
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-31
2-5 CCD Pixel Missing Compensation
Notes)
1) Perform this adjustment only if a void pixel is found on the CCD.
2) Before starting this adjustment, turn power on for more than 15 minutes.
3) The automatic mode (2-5-1) and the manual mode (2-5-2) are available for this adjustment.
In the automatic adjustment mode, “NG” is recognized if there are more than two void pixels on the center area of the screen or
more than eight void pixels on the entire screen. (If NG is recognized, the automatic adjustment is not performed.)
In the manual adjustment mode, it is allowed to correct up to eight void pixels on the entire screen.
In this mode, an arbitrary point may be selected for correction.
2-5-1 CCD Void Pixel Correction (Automatic)
Preparation)
1) Carry out this correction in the product state.
2) Adjustment Conditions
Program AE : AUTO
AF : OFF
Image stabilizer : OFF
Demo mode : OFF
Procedure)
(1) Perform the CCD void pixel correction (automatic mode) according to the table shown below.
* If the DT is “FF” , it is “NG” even through the ST is “OK”.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
CCD PIXEL MISSING COMP. PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 High address setting
1-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 3 WR **00 30 WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK High address "30" is set up.
2 CCD void pixel correction
2-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 300E 00 WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ BUSY Adjustment is in progress.
↑ ↑ RD ↑ −− OK Adjustment is completed. *
3 EEPROM writing
3-1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR 300F 00 WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Writing is completed.
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-32
2-5-2 CCD Void Pixel Correction (Manual)
Note)
1) Use the full scan monitor for this adjustment.
Preparation)
1) Take the product condition for this adjustment.
2) Adjustment conditions
Program AE : LOW LIGHT
AF : OFF
Image stabilizer : OFF
Electronic zoom : OFF
M.EQ. Monitor TV
Procedure)
(1) Before switching to the service mode, press the data screen key on the LANC remote controller to turn OFF the data screen.
(2) Select the service mode, and then set up the CCD void pixel correction adjustment mode (manual) following the table given below.
(3) Press the data screen key on the LANC remote controller to turn OFF the data screen.
(4) Move an unused marker (arranged at left of screen) to the position where a pixel is missing. The movement is done by changing
the data at the address corresponding to each marker.
The addresses corresponding to the markers are shown in Fig.4-23
Notes)
1) The odd-numbered marker is for odd-numbered lines (ODD) and the even-numbered marker is for even-numbered lines (EVEN).
If the marker cannot be aligned with a pixel void position, use the marker for a different line.
A(Normal field of view)
B
EC
DF
G
Area DT Angle of section
A 00 No shift (normal angle)
B 01 Sectioning at top center
C 02 Sectioning at bottom center
D 03 Sectioning at top right
E 04 Sectioning at bottom right
F 05 Sectioning at top left
G 06 Sectioning at bottom left
ElectronicVibration-proofPixel area
CCD*Angle of CCD for selection
Fig. 4-22
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
CCD PIXEL MISSING COMP. PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 3 WR **00 FF WAIT
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK High address "FF" is set up.
2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 RD FF00 00 WAIT Entering the CCD pixel missing compensation
mode is complete. (AGC MAX., Iris close)
3 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 3 WR FFFF 06 WAIT See table below for angle of CCD.
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK for selection.
(Unused marker is appeared at view angle of
"Area"G.)
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-33
2) As shown in the Fig.4-22, the pixel missing compensation over entire CCD area cannot be performed on a single screen due to the
electronic vibration- proof area. Therefore, before the adjustment, change the data of the STEP 3 to select the area for compensa-
tion.
If the marker is not appeared at this time, choose the area where the marker appears, move the marker toward the area for compen-
sation until it appears on the desired area, and write the data temporarily. Then, select the compensation area again, and move the
marker to the pixel void position.
* The following table shows the procedure for moving marker 1.
(5) Carry out write-in to EEPROM according to the table below.
(6) Reset the service mode, and close the lens.
After ten seconds, check that missing pixels have been compensated for.
Notes)
1) Since the marker is larger than a pixel, although they may seem to be superposed on one another at adjustment, there may actually
be some deviation.
2) In marker overlap condition or when there are adjacent missing pixels within ±2 Hex in the V and H directions, writing is impossible.
Marker
1
(ODD)
2
(EVEN)
3
(ODD)
4
(EVEN)
5
(ODD)
6
(EVEN)
7
(ODD)
8
(EVEN)
Direction
H
V
H
V
H
V
H
V
H
V
H
V
H
V
H
V
Address
FF01
FF03
FF05
FF07
FF09
FF0B
FF0D
FF0F
FF11
FF13
FF15
FF17
FF19
FF1B
FF1D
FF1F
Missing
FF03
FF01
FULL SCAN MONITOR
*
Fig. 4-23
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation CCD PIXEL MISSING COMP. PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Specify address in H direction and 5 2 WR FF01 D4 WAIT set WR mode.2) Change the data and then move the ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ADJ ↑ marker (H direction).3) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ OK
2 1) Specify address in V direction and 5 2 WR FF03 A0 WAIT set WR mode.2) Change the data and then move the ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ADJ ↑ marker (H direction).3) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ OK
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 above, and register the marker at the position where pixel is missing.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation CCD PIXEL MISSING COMP. PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 In case of markers 1 to 4 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR FF20 00 WAIT2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Writing is completed.In case of markers 5 to 8 1) Make the setting shown at right. 5 2 WR FF21 00 WAIT2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ OK Writing is completed.
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-34
2-6 Recorder Section Adjustment
Preparation)
1) Except for the tape-path adjustment, carry out adjustment in the product state.
2-6-1 Recorder Setting for Destination
SPEC. Data writing
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out the recorder setting for destination market place.
2-6-2 Y LEVEL Adjustment
TP/TRIG. VIDEO OUT
M. EQ. Oscilloscope
SPEC. Y=980 ± 20 [mV]
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out Y level adjustment.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
RECORDER DESTINATION PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 6 5 WR **00 01
3) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * High address "01" is set up.
2 1) Make the setting shown at right. 6 4 WR 0112 F0 Function Select bit for USA
(For USA model)
2) Make the setting shown at right 6 4 WR 0112 F1 Function Select bit for JPN
(For Japan model)
3) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ F0orF1 * The recorder setting for destination
market place is completed.
Fig.4-24
980 ± 20mV
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
Y LEVEL PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 6 4 WR 001E ADJ White raster is output.
2) For adjustment, change data properly. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ "ADJ" Adjustment is in progress.
3) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * Adjustment is completed.
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-35
2-6-3 C LEVEL Adjustment
TP/TRIG. VIDEO OUT
M. EQ. Oscilloscope
SPEC. C=710 ± 20 [mV]
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out C level adjust-
ment.
2-6-4 AGC Initial Value Adjustment
SIGNAL COLOR BAR
MODE E-E (ANALOG LINE IN)
SPEC. Automatic adjustment
Procedure)
(1) Input a color bar signal to the analog line circuit from the pattern generator.
(2) Carry out AGC initial value adjustment according to the table shown below.
Fig.4-25
710 ± 20mV
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
C LEVEL PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 6 4 WR 001F ADJ Green raster is output.
2) For adjustment, change data properly. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ Adjustment is in progress.
3) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * Adjustment is completed.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
AGC INITIAL PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 7 0 WR **04 --
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ + Automatic adjustment is in progress.
↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * Automatic adjustment is completed.
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-36
2-6-5 SWP Adjustment
MODE Playback of color bar master (DY9-1321-000)
SPEC. Automatic adjustment
Note)
1) Press the STORE key after the error rate is stabilized.
Procedure)
(1) While playing back the color bar master, carry out SWP adjustment referring to the table shown below.
2-6-6 C. FG Adjustment
MODE Playback of color bar master (DY9-1321-000)
SPEC. Automatic adjustment
Procedure)
(1) While playing back the color bar master, carry out C.FG adjustment referring to the table shown below.
2-6-7 EQ Adjustment
MODE Playback of self-recording LP tape (conforming to the format of LP tape manufactured by Panasonic)
SPEC. After adjustment, an error rate should be 2×10 -5 or less.
Notes)
1) For error rate measurement, use a tape conforming to the format of LP tape manufactured by Panasonic.2) For SP/LP selection in recording, use the Recorder menu.
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table shown below, carry out EQ adjustment.(2) After adjustment, play the self-recorded LP part again and check that the error rate is within the allowable specified range.(3) If the result of check is NG, perform EQ adjustment using the self-recording SP tape. Then, with this LP tape, perform EQ
adjustment again.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
SWP PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 7 0 WR **01 --
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ + Automatic adjustment is in progress.
↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * Automatic adjustment is completed.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
C.FG PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 7 0 WR **03 --
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ + Automatic adjustment is in progress.
↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * Automatic adjustment is completed.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
EQ PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Start LP recording.
2 1) Rewind the recorded part, and then
start LP playing back.
3 1) During LP playback, make the 7 0 WR **02 --
setting shown at right ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ + Automatic adjustment is in progress.
2) Press the STORE key. (For approx. ten seconds)
↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * Adjustment is completed.
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-37
2-6-8 Battery Voltage Drop Adjustment
MODE During camera recording in product condition (AF : OFF, LCD PANEL : ON)
SPEC. Power supply voltage: 5.83 ± 0.02 [V]
Note)
1) Perform the adjustment after 4sec of recording start.
Procedure)
(1) Under the above condition, set a power supply voltage to 5.83 ± 0.02[V].
(2) Referring to the table shown below, carry out battery voltage drop adjustment.
2-7 Tape Path Adjustment
Note)
1) For tape path adjustment, the service mode setting is necessary. For the details of setting procedure, refer to the DMC II Service
Manual separately issued.
Preparation)
1) For tape path adjustment, make the recorder adjustment setting (P. 3-2).
Procedure)
(1) Referring to the table given below, playback the alignment tape for tracking adjustment (DY9-1345-000), and carry out tape path
adjustment.
At step 2, adjust DT in a range of 01 to 0F so that the RF envelope will be 70% for tracking shift.
(2) After adjustment, restore tracking shift to the normal condition of the product state (DT: 00).
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
UNDER CUT PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Make the setting shown at right. 7 2 WR **FF "ADJ"
2) Press the STORE key. ↑ ↑ RD ↑ ↑ * Adjustment is completed.
STEP PROCEDURE MONITOR Microcomputer operation
TRACKING SHIFT PG BK MD ADDR DT ST
1 1) Play back the tracking tape.
2 1) During playback, make the setting 7 0 WR **FE 00 Product setting
shown at right.
2) Perform 70% tracking shift by ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ 01~0F Degree of tracking shift being changed.
adjusting DT in a range of 01 to
0F.
3 1) Perform the tape path adjustment with the RF envelope in 70% tracking shift state.
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 ACHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLING ADJUSTMENT
4-38
R-Y
R
BURST
YL
B-Y
Color balance adjustment chart
Copy the chart on a transparent film. Trim and attach thetransparent chart on a vectorscope display.
NTSC ELURA20 MC AELURA10 A
CHAPTER 5. PARTS LIST
CONTEN
EXPLODED VIEWS
Casing Parts Section ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5-2
Right Cover Unit Section ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5-4
Left Cover Unit Section ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 5-6
Main Dial/Rear Cover Section ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 5-8
Recorder Unit Section ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-10
LCD Unit Section --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-12
Camera · Lens Unit Section --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-14
CVF Unit Section --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-16
Mechanical Chassis Section-1 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-18
Mechanical Chassis Section-2 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-20
Mechanical Chassis Section-3 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-22
Mechanical Chassis Section-4 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-24
Accessory Section -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------5-26
ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------3-28
PARTS LIST -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------3-29
5-1
1. Especially critical parts in the power circuit block should not be replaced with other marks.
Critical parts are marked with in this electrical parts list.
CAUTION
5-2
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
Casing Parts Section
(23)
27
(25)(24)
21×2
2×2
35×2
(26)
22
13×2
2
14
12
15
16×2
2
31
33
32
34
21
34
34
3
17
1 6 7
118
9
10
19
20
18
Camera •Lens/Recorder Unit
Left Cover Unit
Right Cover Unit
CVF Unita
3
a
30
5×2
2928
5-3
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
1 XA4-9170-359 000 F 1 SCREW2 XA9-1001-000 000 F 4 SCREW3 XA1-7170-357 000 F 3 SCREW4 XA1-7170-407 000 F 1 SCREW5 DA2-1017-000 000 F 2 SCREW
6 DA2-0931-000 000 B 1 COVER, TOP7 DA2-1018-000 000 F 1 SCREW8 DA2-1015-000 000 F 1 SCREW9 DA2-1473-000 000 B 1 COVER, MIC NEW
10 DA2-0868-000 000 C 1 SHEET, MIC
11 DA2-1021-000 000 C 1 SEAL, LCD T12 D52-0130-000 000 B 1 LENS CAP ASS’Y13 CB1-8698-000 000 F 2 SCREW14 DF1-1630-000 000 B 1 LENS RING ASS’Y15 DG1-4062-000 000 B 1 ZOOM SWITCH ASS’Y
16 XA1-7140-207 000 F 2 SCREW17 DA2-1024-000 000 C 1 CUSHION18 DA2-1023-000 000 C 1 CUSHION19 XA1-7170-257 000 F 1 SCREW20 XA9-1244-000 000 F 1 SCREW
21 XA1-7170-307 000 F 3 SCREW22 DG1-4314-000 000 B 1 REAR COVER ASS’Y NEW23 DS1-5387-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL24 DA2-0844-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, BATT LOCK25 DA2-1479-000 000 B 1 KNOB, EJECT NEW
26 DA2-1504-000 000 B 1 COVER, AV NEW27 DG1-4096-000 000 B 1 EYE PIECE ASS’Y28 DA2-1453-000 000 B 1 COVER, REMOCON WINDOW NEW29 DA2-1454-000 000 B 1 COVER, TALLY WINDOW NEW30 DA2-1452-000 000 B 1 FRONT COVER ASS’Y NEW
31 DA2-1020-000 000 C 2 MAGNET32 DA2-1465-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD HOLDER U NEW33 DA2-1466-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD HOLDER L NEW34 DA2-1016-000 000 F 2 SCREW35 DA2-1455-000 000 F 2 SCREW NEW
5-4
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
Right Cover Unit Section
LCD Unit
22
13
23
5×2
20×2
14×2
47
24
15 18
17
11
6
3×2
19×2
21×2
16
8
12
1
2
10
9
5-5
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
1 DH2-2183-000 000 C 1 FPC, BATTERY2 DG1-4079-000 000 C 1 BATTERY TERMINAL ASS’Y3 XA1-7170-307 000 F 2 SCREW4 DA2-1025-000 000 C 2 CUSHION5 XA9-1000-000 000 F 2 SCREW
6 DA2-0918-000 000 C 1 PLATE, FPC7 DA2-1470-000 000 C 1 SHEET, INSULATION NEW8 DA2-1462-000 000 B 1 COVER, GRIP NEW9 DA2-1467-000 000 B 1 TAPE, GRIP COVER NEW
10 DA2-1461-000 000 B 1 COVER, RIGHT NEW
11 DA2-1472-000 000 B 1 HOLDER, HAND STRAP NEW12 DA2-0843-000 000 C 1 TRIPOD13 DA2-0842-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, GRIP BELT14 DA2-0845-000 000 B 2 CUSHION, R COVER15 DA2-1008-000 000 B 1 CUSHION, BATTERY
16 XA4-9170-457 000 F 1 SCREW17 DA2-0917-000 000 B 1 COVER, FPC18 DS1-5380-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL19 XA1-7200-457 000 F 2 SCREW20 DA2-1009-000 000 B 2 CUSHION, LCD
21 DA2-1007-000 000 B 2 SEAL, R COVER22 DA2-1014-000 000 B 1 LABEL, CAUTION23 DG1-4316-000 000 B 1 RECORDER KEY ASS’Y NEW ELURA20 MC A
DG1-4097-000 000 B 1 RECORDER KEY ASS’Y ELURA10 A24 DA2-1506-000 000 C 1 SHEET, JACK NEW
5-6
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
Left Cover Unit Section
22×2
18×2
18×2
16×2
6
17
19
18
See the figure below.
15
20
ELURA10 A
32
21
22
9
28
23
2524
Main Dial Ass’y
Rear Cover
10
1
3
2
4
8
7 9
11
6
26×2
27
a
a
530
1413
12
29
31
ELURA20 MC A
5-7
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
1 DA2-1451-000 000 B 1 COVER, LEFT NEW2 DA2-0952-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, FPC3 DA2-0991-000 000 B 1 LABEL, LITHIUM 24 DA2-0953-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, EJECT SW5 XA9-1274-000 000 F 1 SCREW
6 XA9-1001-000 000 F 2 SCREW7 DA2-1009-000 000 B 1 CUSHION, LCD8 DH2-4055-000 000 C 1 FPC, MMC-MAIN9 XA9-1000-000 000 F 2 SCREW
10 DA2-0980-000 000 B 1 COVER, CARD ELURA20 MC A
DA2-0981-000 000 B 1 COVER, CARD ELURA10 A11 DA2-0950-000 000 B 1 KNOB, P.SCAN12 DA2-0881-000 000 C 1 SPRING, PLATE13 DA2-0883-000 000 C 1 TAPE, C COVER14 DA2-0944-000 000 B 1 PLATE, DIAL
15 XA4-9140-287 000 F 1 SCREW16 XA9-1002-000 000 F 2 SCREW17 DA2-1471-000 000 B 1 STRAP, HAND NEW18 XA1-7170-207 000 F 5 SCREW19 XA1-7170-357 000 F 1 SCREW
20 DG1-4078-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, MMC ELURA20 MC A21 DG1-4289-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, MMC NEW ELURA20 MC A
DG1-4290-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, MMC NEW ELURA10 A22 XA1-7170-257 000 F 3 SCREW23 DA2-0994-000 000 B 1 HOLDER, GRIP BELT
24 DA2-0993-000 000 C 1 SHEET, MMC25 DF1-1624-000 000 C 1 CASSETTE ARM ASS’Y26 XA1-7170-307 000 F 2 SCREW27 XA9-1004-000 000 F 1 SCREW28 XA1-7170-607 000 F 1 SCREW
29 DA2-0986-000 000 B 1 LABEL, CAUTION NEW30 DA2-0845-000 000 B 1 CUSHION, R COVER31 DA2-1156-000 000 C 1 GUIDE, C ARM NEW32 DA2-0967-000 000 C 1 COVER, SD HOLDER NEW ELURA10 A
5-8
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
Main Dial/Rear Cover Section
3
12
21
67
8
5×2
(16)
(17)
4
9
14
13
15
11
10
5-9
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
1 DA2-0978-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, LITHIUM2 DA2-0976-000 000 C 1 LITHIUM TERMINAL +3 DA2-0977-000 000 C 1 LITHIUM TERMINAL -4 DG1-4029-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, LITHIUM5 XA9-1004-000 000 F 2 SCREW
6 DA2-0974-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, TRIGGER7 DS1-5385-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL8 DA2-0973-000 000 B 1 KEY, TRIGGER9 DA2-1486-000 000 B 1 KNOB, AP NEW
10 DA2-0990-000 000 B 1 LABEL, LITHIUM 1
11 DA2-1483-000 000 B 1 COVER, CASSETTE REAR NEW12 DG1-4054-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, FE13 DA2-1485-000 000 B 1 KNOB, OPEN NEW14 DA2-1487-000 000 B 1 KNOB, FE NEW15 DG1-4309-000 000 B 1 MAIN DIAL ASS’Y NEW ELURA20 MC A
DG1-4312-000 000 B 1 MAIN DIAL ASS’Y NEW ELURA10 A16 DA2-1474-000 000 B 1 COVER, M DIAL NEW ELURA20 MC A
DA2-1477-000 000 B 1 COVER, M DIAL NEW ELURA10 A17 XA9-1252-000 000 F 1 SCREW
5-10
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
Recorder Unit Section
17×216×2
12
20
24
25
2728
29
2632
31
30
33
6
3435
6
3639
37
21
22
23
18
19
15
10
14×2
66×2
13×211
7
8
12
3 9
4
Camera • Lens Unit
5
38
6×3
5-11
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
1 DY1-8282-000 000 C 1 RECORDER UNIT DMC II2 DA1-9796-000 000 B 1 LABEL, CASSETTE3 DA1-9903-000 000 B 1 LABEL, S CHASSIS4 DA2-0859-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, RECORDER5 DY1-8273-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, SUB
6 XA1-7170-257 000 F 8 SCREW7 DA2-0860-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, INSULATION8 DA2-1151-000 000 C 1 CUSHION9 DA2-0897-000 000 C 1 SHEET, INSULATION
10 DA2-1152-000 000 C 1 CUSHION
11 DA1-9788-000 000 F 1 WASHER12 XA9-1260-000 000 F 1 SCREW13 DA1-9779-000 000 C 2 RUBBER, INSULATION14 XA9-1167-000 000 F 2 SCREW15 XA9-1001-000 000 F 1 SCREW
16 DA2-0896-000 000 C 2 RUBBER, INSULATION17 XA9-1244-000 000 F 2 SCREW18 DA2-0880-000 000 C 1 SHEET, INSULATION19 DA2-1028-000 000 C 1 SHEET, AUDIO 220 DG1-4023-050 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, AUDIO NEW
21 DG1-4056-000 000 C 1 MIC ASS’Y22 DA2-0997-000 000 C 1 SHEET, MIC FPC23 DA2-0867-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, MIC24 DA2-0858-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, INSULATION25 DH2-2174-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, MULTI-AUDIO
26 DY1-8379-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, MAIN NEW ELURA20 MC ADY1-8381-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, MAIN NEW ELURA10 A
27 DA2-0863-000 000 C 1 CASE, SHIELD MAIN 128 DH2-2175-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, SUB-MAIN29 DH2-2182-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, HA SHIELD
30 DA2-1158-000 000 C 1 SHEET, SDRAM31 DA2-1027-000 000 C 1 SHEET, AUDIO 132 DA2-0865-000 000 C 1 CASE, SHIELD MAIN 233 DA2-0846-000 000 C 1 SHEET, MAIN34 DG1-4028-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, MULTI
35 DA2-0855-000 000 C 1 PLATE, GND36 DA2-0832-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, MULTI37 DG1-4051-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, JACK38 DG1-3978-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y SUB-DMC39 DA2-0895-000 000 B 1 LABEL, FUSE NEW
5-12
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
LCD Unit Section
8
16
4
15
25×5
1×2
22
24
26
21
20
18
17
12
11
10
87
62
3
5
1314
9
8
19
23
5-13
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
1 XA4-9170-409 000 F 2 SCREW2 DA2-0915-000 000 B 1 COVER, HINGE L3 DG1-4065-000 000 C 1 HINGE ASS’Y, LCD4 DG1-4052-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, LCD SW5 DA2-0914-000 000 B 1 COVER, HINGE R
6 DA2-1020-000 000 C 1 MAGNET7 DA2-1019-000 000 B 1 SEAL, MAGNET8 XA1-7170-257 000 F 3 SCREW9 DA2-1464-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD BOTTOM NEW
10 DA2-0907-000 000 C 1 PLATE, LCD2
11 DA2-0906-000 000 C 1 PLATE, LCD112 XA4-9170-359 000 F 1 SCREW13 DA2-0909-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, LCD LOCK14 DA2-0908-000 000 B 1 KNOB, LCD15 DS1-5380-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
*1 16 DH9-0831-000 000 C 1 LCD ASS’Y*2 DY1-8274-000 000 C 1 LCD ASS’Y
17 DG1-7377-000 000 C 1 BACKLIGHT ASS’Y (LCD)18 DA2-0910-000 000 C 1 SHEET, LCD119 DG1-4024-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, LCD
20 DA2-0911-000 000 C 1 SHEET, LCD221 DA2-1463-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD TOP NEW ELURA20 MC A
DA2-1498-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD TOP NEW ELURA10 A22 DH2-2177-000 000 C 1 FPC, LCD-MAIN23 DA2-0912-000 000 C 1 CUSHION
24 DA2-1012-000 000 C 1 SHEET, FPC25 DA2-1015-000 000 F 5 SCREW26 DA2-1160-000 000 B 1 SHEET, LCD FPC
*1 : Same quality as the production line.
*2 : Free from the pixel dot.
5-14
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
Camera · Lens Unit Section
(5)
15
(5)
(5)(4) 13×2
10
1217
16
14
98
2
3
(7)
2
(5) (5)
1(6)
11
5-15
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
1 DA2-0945-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, LENS2 DA2-1026-000 000 C 2 CUSHION3 DG1-4066-000 000 C 1 LENS ASS’Y4 YH8-0097-000 000 C 1 IG METER ASS’Y5 XA4-9170-407 000 F 5 SCREW
6 YH7-0200-000 000 C 1 MOTOR, PZ7 YH7-0201-000 000 C 1 MOTOR, AF8 DH9-0836-000 000 C 1 FILTER, IR9 DA2-0862-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, INSULATION
10 DY1-8271-000 000 C 1 CCD ASS’Y
11 DA2-0899-000 000 C 1 PLATE, GRAPHITE CCD12 DG1-4025-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, CCD13 XA4-9170-609 000 F 2 SCREW14 DG1-4026-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, CA15 DH2-2178-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, CA-MAIN
16 DA2-1159-000 000 F 1 WASHER17 XD1-1101-825 000 F 1 WASHER
5-16
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
CVF Unit Section
15
14
98
1312
11
65 1
2
34
7
16
17
10
5-17
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
1 XA4-9170-309 000 F 1 SCREW2 DA2-0896-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, INSULATION3 DA2-0869-000 000 C 1 PLATE, CVF4 DG1-4027-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, CVF5 XA4-9170-357 000 F 1 SCREW
6 DH2-2179-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, CVF-MAIN7 DG1-4067-000 000 C 1 BACKLIGHT ASS’Y (CVF)8 DA2-0884-000 000 C 1 CUSHION9 DA2-0885-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, INSULATION
10 DA2-0870-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, CVF
11 DF1-1628-000 000 C 1 CVF LEVER ASS’Y12 DA2-0877-000 000 C 1 PLATE, FINDER RELEASE13 CB1-5509-000 000 F 1 NUT, ONEWAY GEAR14 DS1-5386-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL15 WG2-5194-000 000 C 1 LCD ASS’Y, CVF
16 DA2-0873-000 000 C 1 PLATE, LCD STOPPER17 DA1-9760-000 000 C 1 PLATE, MASK
5-18
DMC II
Mechanical Chassis Section-1
1
4
(2)
(3)
6
7
1011
12
5×4
2×3
8
(9)
Slide Chassis Ass’y
5-19
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
DMC II
1 DG1-3861-000 000 C 1 CASSETTE HOLDER ASS’Y2 DA2-0642-000 000 F 4 SCREW3 DF1-1569-000 000 C 1 CASSETTE COVER ASS’Y4 DA2-0646-000 000 F 1 WASHER5 DA2-0643-000 000 F 4 SCREW
6 DF1-1514-000 000 C 1 IDLER GEAR ASS’Y7 DG1-3857-000 000 C 1 DRIVE GEAR ASS’Y8 DY1-8283-000 000 E 1 DRUM ASS’Y (3CH)9 DA2-0793-000 000 C 1 PLATE, TAPE GUIDE
10 DY1-8210-000 000 C 1 MAIN CHASSIS ASS’Y
11 DA2-0758-000 000 C 1 SPRING, PLATE12 DA2-0757-000 000 F 1 SCREW
5-20
DMC II
Mechanical Chassis Section-2
(2)1
(3)
(4)
(8)
(5)×2
(6)
(9)
(13)
(14)
(15)
19
(16)
(11)(14)
(18)
(17)
(10)
(5)
(12)
(7)
5-21
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
DMC II
1 DY1-8211-000 000 C 1 SLIDE CHASSIS ASS’Y2 DA2-0712-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL3 DA2-0646-000 000 F 1 WASHER4 DA2-0703-000 000 C 1 EJECT LEVER5 DA2-0642-000 000 F 3 SCREW
6 DA2-0661-000 000 C 1 COVER, PINCH ROLLER7 DS1-0175-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL8 DG1-3859-000 000 C 1 REVIEW ARM ASS’Y9 DS1-0172-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
10 DF1-1566-000 000 C 1 BRAKE, T SUB
11 DA2-0782-000 000 F 1 WASHER12 DA2-0660-000 000 C 1 COVER, REVIEW ARM13 DF1-1548-000 000 C 1 TENSION ARM ASS’Y14 DA2-0645-000 000 F 2 WASHER15 DF1-1549-000 000 C 1 TENSION BRAKE ASS’Y
16 DS1-0169-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL17 DH9-0812-000 000 C 1 TAPE DETECTION SW ASS’Y18 DA2-0643-000 000 F 1 SCREW19 DS1-0173-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
5-22
DMC II
Mechanical Chassis Section-3
FACE
12×2
22×2
13
12×3
7
11
9
10
8
2
3
6 4
5
14
15
16
1820
19
17
6
21
1×2
5-23
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
DMC II
1 DA2-0780-000 000 F 2 SCREW2 DA2-0645-000 000 F 1 WASHER3 DA2-0747-000 000 C 1 GUIDE RAIL4 DF1-1546-000 000 C 1 ARM ASS’Y, S5 DF1-1547-000 000 C 1 ARM ASS’Y, T
6 DA2-0781-000 000 F 2 WASHER7 DF1-1544-000 000 C 1 T GUIDE ROLLER ASS’Y8 DF1-1550-000 000 C 1 S GUIDE ROLLER ASS’Y9 DA2-0774-000 000 C 2 POST RING, RUBBER
10 DF1-1545-000 000 C 2 SKATE ASS’Y
11 DF1-1551-000 000 C 1 DRUM BASE ASS’Y12 DA2-0644-000 000 F 5 SCREW13 DG1-3865-000 000 C 1 LOADING MOTOR ASS’Y14 DA2-0646-000 000 F 1 WASHER15 DF1-1567-000 000 C 1 LEVER ASS’Y, S MODE
16 DG1-3858-000 000 C 1 ARM ASS’Y, PINCH ROLLER17 DS1-0174-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL18 XD2-1100-102 000 C 1 E RING19 DF1-1517-000 000 C 1 PLATE, DRIVE GEAR20 DA2-0586-000 000 C 1 GEAR, CP
21 DH2-2115-000 000 C 1 FPC, LOADING MOTOR22 XA1-7140-147 000 F 2 SCREW
5-24
DMC II
Mechanical Chassis Section-4
REAR FACE
1×2
2
5
6
7
8
9
5
10
11
12
1
13
14
3
4
5-25
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
DMC II
1 XA1-7140-147 000 F 3 SCREW2 DF1-1525-000 000 C 1 GEAR ASS’Y, TRANS.3 DA2-0590-000 000 C 1 GEAR, CAM 24 DF1-1520-000 000 C 1 LEVER ASS’Y, PR CONTROL5 DA2-0643-000 000 F 2 SCREW
6 DF1-1516-000 000 C 1 GEAR, CAM 17 DF1-1518-000 000 C 1 LEVER ASS’Y, MODE8 DA2-0640-000 000 C 1 COVER, MODE GEAR9 DG1-3860-000 000 C 1 GEAR, MODE
10 DA2-0666-000 000 C 1 COVER, LM GEAR
11 DA2-0604-000 000 C 1 GEAR, LM12 DA2-0630-000 000 C 1 LEVER, LOAD13 DA2-0638-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, SLIDE LEVER14 DF1-1522-000 000 C 1 LEVER, SLIDE
5-26
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
Accessory Section
PLUG TYPE
DU-300
A
JPN
E
B
AS
CA-400
BP-406/412/422
2
4
1
SDC-8M
WL-D75/76
(6)
(7)
5
3
5-27
MECHANICAL PARTS
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
1 DY1-8276-000 000 C 1 COVER, TERMINAL BP-4062 D82-0642-000 000 C 1 CORD, AC(A)3 DY1-8383-000 000 C 1 CARD, SD SDC-8M ELURA20 MC A4 D82-0660-000 000 C 1 DOCKING UNIT DU-3005 D83-0562-000 000 C 1 WL-D75A WIRELESS CONTROLLER ELURA20 MC A
D83-0572-000 000 C 1 WL-D76A WIRELESS CONTROLLER ELURA10 A6 DY1-8121-000 000 C 1 COVER, BATTERY7 DY1-8119-000 000 C 1 LABEL, WIRELESS CONTROLLER(A)
5-28
ELECTRICAL PARTS
SYMBOL PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
CN100 VS1-6640-027 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, 27PCN101 VS1-6640-025 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, 25PCN102 VS1-6674-005 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, 5PCN200 VS1-6640-027 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, 27P
CN1401 VS1-6674-006 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, 6P
CN1402 VS1-6640-031 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, 31PCN1501 VS1-6640-021 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, 21PCN1502 VS1-6640-027 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, 27PCN3201 VS1-6307-014 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, 14PCN3202 VS1-6640-027 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, 27P
CN3401 WS1-5879-000 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, DVFU3201 WD1-5062-000 000 D 1 FUSEFU3202 WD1-5062-000 000 D 1 FUSE
JC WS1-5524-000 000 C 1 JACK, A/VSW WC4-5155-000 000 C 1 SWITCH, TRIGGER
SW101 WC5-5134-000 000 C 1 SWITCH, DIAL
5-29
PARTS LIST
PAGE PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
17 CB1-5509-000 000 F 1 NUT, ONEWAY GEAR3 CB1-8698-000 000 F 2 SCREW3 D52-0130-000 000 B 1 LENS CAP ASS’Y
27 D82-0642-000 000 C 1 CORD, AC(A)27 D82-0660-000 000 C 1 DOCKING UNIT DU-300
27 D83-0562-000 000 C 1 WL-D75A WIRELESS CONTROLLER ELURA20 MC A27 D83-0572-000 000 C 1 WL-D76A WIRELESS CONTROLLER ELURA10 A17 DA1-9760-000 000 C 1 PLATE, MASK11 DA1-9779-000 000 C 2 RUBBER, INSULATION11 DA1-9788-000 000 F 1 WASHER
11 DA1-9796-000 000 B 1 LABEL, CASSETTE11 DA1-9903-000 000 B 1 LABEL, S CHASSIS23 DA2-0586-000 000 C 1 GEAR, CP25 DA2-0590-000 000 C 1 GEAR, CAM 225 DA2-0604-000 000 C 1 GEAR, LM
25 DA2-0630-000 000 C 1 LEVER, LOAD25 DA2-0638-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, SLIDE LEVER25 DA2-0640-000 000 C 1 COVER, MODE GEAR
19,21 DA2-0642-000 000 F 7 SCREW19,21,25 DA2-0643-000 000 F 7 SCREW
23 DA2-0644-000 000 F 5 SCREW21,23 DA2-0645-000 000 F 3 WASHER
19,21,23 DA2-0646-000 000 F 3 WASHER21 DA2-0660-000 000 C 1 COVER, REVIEW ARM21 DA2-0661-000 000 C 1 COVER, PINCH ROLLER
25 DA2-0666-000 000 C 1 COVER, LM GEAR21 DA2-0703-000 000 C 1 EJECT LEVER21 DA2-0712-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL23 DA2-0747-000 000 C 1 GUIDE RAIL19 DA2-0757-000 000 F 1 SCREW
19 DA2-0758-000 000 C 1 SPRING, PLATE23 DA2-0774-000 000 C 2 POST RING, RUBBER23 DA2-0780-000 000 F 2 SCREW23 DA2-0781-000 000 F 2 WASHER21 DA2-0782-000 000 F 1 WASHER
19 DA2-0793-000 000 C 1 PLATE, TAPE GUIDE11 DA2-0832-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, MULTI5 DA2-0842-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, GRIP BELT5 DA2-0843-000 000 C 1 TRIPOD3 DA2-0844-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, BATT LOCK
5,7 DA2-0845-000 000 B 3 CUSHION, R COVER11 DA2-0846-000 000 C 1 SHEET, MAIN11 DA2-0855-000 000 C 1 PLATE, GND11 DA2-0858-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, INSULATION11 DA2-0859-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, RECORDER
11 DA2-0860-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, INSULATION15 DA2-0862-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, INSULATION11 DA2-0863-000 000 C 1 CASE, SHIELD MAIN 111 DA2-0865-000 000 C 1 CASE, SHIELD MAIN 211 DA2-0867-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, MIC
3 DA2-0868-000 000 C 1 SHEET, MIC17 DA2-0869-000 000 C 1 PLATE, CVF17 DA2-0870-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, CVF17 DA2-0873-000 000 C 1 PLATE, LCD STOPPER17 DA2-0877-000 000 C 1 PLATE, FINDER RELEASE
11 DA2-0880-000 000 C 1 SHEET, INSULATION7 DA2-0881-000 000 C 1 SPRING, PLATE7 DA2-0883-000 000 C 1 TAPE, C COVER
17 DA2-0884-000 000 C 1 CUSHION17 DA2-0885-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, INSULATION
5-30
PARTS LIST
PAGE PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
11 DA2-0895-000 000 B 1 LABEL, FUSE NEW11,17 DA2-0896-000 000 C 3 RUBBER, INSULATION
11 DA2-0897-000 000 C 1 SHEET, INSULATION15 DA2-0899-000 000 C 1 PLATE, GRAPHITE CCD13 DA2-0906-000 000 C 1 PLATE, LCD1
13 DA2-0907-000 000 C 1 PLATE, LCD213 DA2-0908-000 000 B 1 KNOB, LCD13 DA2-0909-000 000 C 1 SHAFT, LCD LOCK13 DA2-0910-000 000 C 1 SHEET, LCD113 DA2-0911-000 000 C 1 SHEET, LCD2
13 DA2-0912-000 000 C 1 CUSHION13 DA2-0914-000 000 B 1 COVER, HINGE R13 DA2-0915-000 000 B 1 COVER, HINGE L5 DA2-0917-000 000 B 1 COVER, FPC5 DA2-0918-000 000 C 1 PLATE, FPC
3 DA2-0931-000 000 B 1 COVER, TOP7 DA2-0944-000 000 B 1 PLATE, DIAL
15 DA2-0945-000 000 C 1 RUBBER, LENS7 DA2-0950-000 000 B 1 KNOB, P.SCAN7 DA2-0952-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, FPC
7 DA2-0953-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, EJECT SW7 DA2-0967-000 000 C 1 COVER, SD HOLDER NEW ELURA10 A9 DA2-0973-000 000 B 1 KEY, TRIGGER9 DA2-0974-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, TRIGGER9 DA2-0976-000 000 C 1 LITHIUM TERMINAL +
9 DA2-0977-000 000 C 1 LITHIUM TERMINAL -9 DA2-0978-000 000 C 1 HOLDER, LITHIUM7 DA2-0980-000 000 B 1 COVER, CARD ELURA20 MC A7 DA2-0981-000 000 B 1 COVER, CARD ELURA10 A7 DA2-0986-000 000 B 1 LABEL, CAUTION NEW
9 DA2-0990-000 000 B 1 LABEL, LITHIUM 17 DA2-0991-000 000 B 1 LABEL, LITHIUM 27 DA2-0993-000 000 C 1 SHEET, MMC7 DA2-0994-000 000 B 1 HOLDER, GRIP BELT
11 DA2-0997-000 000 C 1 SHEET, MIC FPC
5 DA2-1007-000 000 B 2 SEAL, R COVER5 DA2-1008-000 000 B 1 CUSHION, BATTERY
5,7 DA2-1009-000 000 B 3 CUSHION, LCD13 DA2-1012-000 000 C 1 SHEET, FPC5 DA2-1014-000 000 B 1 LABEL, CAUTION
3,13 DA2-1015-000 000 F 6 SCREW3 DA2-1016-000 000 F 2 SCREW3 DA2-1017-000 000 F 2 SCREW3 DA2-1018-000 000 F 1 SCREW
13 DA2-1019-000 000 B 1 SEAL, MAGNET
3,13 DA2-1020-000 000 C 3 MAGNET3 DA2-1021-000 000 C 1 SEAL, LCD T3 DA2-1023-000 000 C 1 CUSHION3 DA2-1024-000 000 C 1 CUSHION5 DA2-1025-000 000 C 2 CUSHION
15 DA2-1026-000 000 C 2 CUSHION11 DA2-1027-000 000 C 1 SHEET, AUDIO 111 DA2-1028-000 000 C 1 SHEET, AUDIO 211 DA2-1151-000 000 C 1 CUSHION11 DA2-1152-000 000 C 1 CUSHION
7 DA2-1156-000 000 C 1 GUIDE, C ARM NEW11 DA2-1158-000 000 C 1 SHEET, SDRAM15 DA2-1159-000 000 F 1 WASHER13 DA2-1160-000 000 B 1 SHEET, LCD FPC7 DA2-1451-000 000 B 1 COVER, LEFT NEW
5-31
PARTS LIST
PAGE PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
3 DA2-1452-000 000 B 1 FRONT COVER ASS’Y NEW3 DA2-1453-000 000 B 1 COVER, REMOCON WINDOW NEW3 DA2-1454-000 000 B 1 COVER, TALLY WINDOW NEW3 DA2-1455-000 000 F 2 SCREW NEW5 DA2-1461-000 000 B 1 COVER, RIGHT NEW
5 DA2-1462-000 000 B 1 COVER, GRIP NEW13 DA2-1463-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD TOP NEW ELURA20 MC A13 DA2-1464-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD BOTTOM NEW3 DA2-1465-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD HOLDER U NEW3 DA2-1466-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD HOLDER L NEW
5 DA2-1467-000 000 B 1 TAPE, GRIP COVER NEW5 DA2-1470-000 000 C 1 SHEET, INSULATION NEW7 DA2-1471-000 000 B 1 STRAP, HAND NEW5 DA2-1472-000 000 B 1 HOLDER, HAND STRAP NEW3 DA2-1473-000 000 B 1 COVER, MIC NEW
9 DA2-1474-000 000 B 1 COVER, M DIAL NEW ELURA20 MC A9 DA2-1477-000 000 B 1 COVER, M DIAL NEW ELURA10 A3 DA2-1479-000 000 B 1 KNOB, EJECT NEW9 DA2-1483-000 000 B 1 COVER, CASSETTE REAR NEW9 DA2-1485-000 000 B 1 KNOB, OPEN NEW
9 DA2-1486-000 000 B 1 KNOB, AP NEW9 DA2-1487-000 000 B 1 KNOB, FE NEW
13 DA2-1498-000 000 B 1 COVER, LCD TOP NEW ELURA10 A3 DA2-1504-000 000 B 1 COVER, AV NEW5 DA2-1506-000 000 C 1 SHEET, JACK NEW
19 DF1-1514-000 000 C 1 IDLER GEAR ASS’Y25 DF1-1516-000 000 C 1 GEAR, CAM 123 DF1-1517-000 000 C 1 PLATE, DRIVE GEAR25 DF1-1518-000 000 C 1 LEVER ASS’Y, MODE25 DF1-1520-000 000 C 1 LEVER ASS’Y, PR CONTROL
25 DF1-1522-000 000 C 1 LEVER, SLIDE25 DF1-1525-000 000 C 1 GEAR ASS’Y, TRANS.23 DF1-1544-000 000 C 1 T GUIDE ROLLER ASS’Y23 DF1-1545-000 000 C 2 SKATE ASS’Y23 DF1-1546-000 000 C 1 ARM ASS’Y, S
23 DF1-1547-000 000 C 1 ARM ASS’Y, T21 DF1-1548-000 000 C 1 TENSION ARM ASS’Y21 DF1-1549-000 000 C 1 TENSION BRAKE ASS’Y23 DF1-1550-000 000 C 1 S GUIDE ROLLER ASS’Y23 DF1-1551-000 000 C 1 DRUM BASE ASS’Y
21 DF1-1566-000 000 C 1 BRAKE, T SUB23 DF1-1567-000 000 C 1 LEVER ASS’Y, S MODE19 DF1-1569-000 000 C 1 CASSETTE COVER ASS’Y7 DF1-1624-000 000 C 1 CASSETTE ARM ASS’Y
17 DF1-1628-000 000 C 1 CVF LEVER ASS’Y
3 DF1-1630-000 000 B 1 LENS RING ASS’Y19 DG1-3857-000 000 C 1 DRIVE GEAR ASS’Y23 DG1-3858-000 000 C 1 ARM ASS’Y, PINCH ROLLER21 DG1-3859-000 000 C 1 REVIEW ARM ASS’Y25 DG1-3860-000 000 C 1 GEAR, MODE
19 DG1-3861-000 000 C 1 CASSETTE HOLDER ASS’Y23 DG1-3865-000 000 C 1 LOADING MOTOR ASS’Y11 DG1-3978-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, SUB-DMC11 DG1-4023-050 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, AUDIO NEW13 DG1-4024-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, LCD
15 DG1-4025-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, CCD15 DG1-4026-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, CA17 DG1-4027-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, CVF11 DG1-4028-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, MULTI9 DG1-4029-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, LITHIUM
5-32
PARTS LIST
PAGE PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
11 DG1-4051-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, JACK13 DG1-4052-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, LCD SW9 DG1-4054-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, FE
11 DG1-4056-000 000 C 1 MIC ASS’Y3 DG1-4062-000 000 B 1 ZOOM SWITCH ASS’Y
13 DG1-4065-000 000 C 1 HINGE ASS’Y, LCD15 DG1-4066-000 000 C 1 LENS ASS’Y17 DG1-4067-000 000 C 1 BACKLIGHT ASS’Y (CVF)7 DG1-4078-000 000 B 1 COVER ASS’Y, MMC ELURA20 MC A5 DG1-4079-000 000 C 1 BATTERY TERMINAL ASS’Y
3 DG1-4096-000 000 B 1 EYE PIECE ASS’Y5 DG1-4097-000 000 B 1 RECORDER KEY ASS’Y ELURA10 A7 DG1-4289-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, MMC NEW ELURA20 MC A7 DG1-4290-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, MMC NEW ELURA10 A9 DG1-4309-000 000 B 1 MAIN DIAL ASS’Y NEW ELURA20 MC A
9 DG1-4312-000 000 B 1 MAIN DIAL ASS’Y NEW ELURA10 A3 DG1-4314-000 000 B 1 REAR COVER ASS’Y NEW5 DG1-4316-000 000 B 1 RECORDER KEY ASS’Y NEW ELURA20 MC A
13 DG1-7377-000 000 C 1 BACKLIGHT ASS’Y (LCD)23 DH2-2115-000 000 C 1 FPC, LOADING MOTOR
11 DH2-2174-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, MULTI-AUDIO11 DH2-2175-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, SUB-MAIN13 DH2-2177-000 000 C 1 FPC, LCD-MAIN15 DH2-2178-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, CA-MAIN17 DH2-2179-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, CVF-MAIN
11 DH2-2182-000 000 C 1 FPC ASS’Y, HA SHIELD5 DH2-2183-000 000 C 1 FPC, BATTERY7 DH2-4055-000 000 C 1 FPC, MMC-MAIN
21 DH9-0812-000 000 C 1 TAPE DETECTION SW ASS’Y*1 13 DH9-0831-000 000 C 1 LCD ASS’Y
15 DH9-0836-000 000 C 1 FILTER, IR21 DS1-0169-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL21 DS1-0172-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL21 DS1-0173-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL23 DS1-0174-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
21 DS1-0175-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL5,13 DS1-5380-000 000 C 2 SPRING, COIL
9 DS1-5385-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL17 DS1-5386-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL3 DS1-5387-000 000 C 1 SPRING, COIL
27 DY1-8119-000 000 C 1 LABEL, WIRELESS CONTROLLER(A)27 DY1-8121-000 000 C 1 COVER, BATTERY19 DY1-8210-000 000 C 1 MAIN CHASSIS ASS’Y21 DY1-8211-000 000 C 1 SLIDE CHASSIS ASS’Y15 DY1-8271-000 000 C 1 CCD ASS’Y
11 DY1-8273-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, SUB*2 13 DY1-8274-000 000 C 1 LCD ASS’Y
27 DY1-8276-000 000 C 1 COVER, TERMINAL BP-40611 DY1-8282-000 000 C 1 RECORDER UNIT DMC II19 DY1-8283-000 000 E 1 DRUM ASS’Y (3CH)
11 DY1-8379-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, MAIN NEW ELURA20 MC A11 DY1-8381-000 000 C 1 PCB ASS’Y, MAIN NEW ELURA10 A27 DY1-8383-000 000 C 1 CARD, SD SDC-8M ELURA20 MC A
VS1-6307-014 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, 14PVS1-6640-021 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, 21P
VS1-6640-025 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, 25PVS1-6640-027 000 C 4 CONNECTOR, 27PVS1-6640-031 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, 31PVS1-6674-005 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, 5PVS1-6674-006 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, 6P
5-33
PARTS LIST
PAGE PART NO. CLASS Q’TY DESCRIPTION REMARKS
ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
WC4-5155-000 000 C 1 SWITCH, TRIGGERWC5-5134-000 000 C 1 SWITCH, DIALWD1-5062-000 000 D 2 FUSE
17 WG2-5194-000 000 C 1 LCD ASS’Y, CVFWS1-5524-000 000 C 1 JACK, A/V
WS1-5879-000 000 C 1 CONNECTOR, DV23,25 XA1-7140-147 000 F 5 SCREW
3 XA1-7140-207 000 F 2 SCREW7 XA1-7170-207 000 F 5 SCREW
3,7,11,13 XA1-7170-257 000 F 15 SCREW
3,5,7 XA1-7170-307 000 F 7 SCREW3,7 XA1-7170-357 000 F 4 SCREW
3 XA1-7170-407 000 F 1 SCREW7 XA1-7170-607 000 F 1 SCREW5 XA1-7200-457 000 F 2 SCREW
7 XA4-9140-287 000 F 1 SCREW17 XA4-9170-309 000 F 1 SCREW17 XA4-9170-357 000 F 1 SCREW
3,13 XA4-9170-359 000 F 2 SCREW15 XA4-9170-407 000 F 5 SCREW
13 XA4-9170-409 000 F 2 SCREW5 XA4-9170-457 000 F 1 SCREW
15 XA4-9170-609 000 F 2 SCREW5,7 XA9-1000-000 000 F 4 SCREW
3,7,11 XA9-1001-000 000 F 7 SCREW
7 XA9-1002-000 000 F 2 SCREW7,9 XA9-1004-000 000 F 3 SCREW11 XA9-1167-000 000 F 2 SCREW
3,11 XA9-1244-000 000 F 3 SCREW9 XA9-1252-000 000 F 1 SCREW
11 XA9-1260-000 000 F 1 SCREW7 XA9-1274-000 000 F 1 SCREW
15 XD1-1101-825 000 F 1 WASHER23 XD2-1100-102 000 C 1 E RING15 YH7-0200-000 000 C 1 MOTOR, PZ
15 YH7-0201-000 000 C 1 MOTOR, AF15 YH8-0097-000 000 C 1 IG METER ASS’Y
CHAPTER 6. BLOCK DIAGRAMS
CONTENTS
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
CAMERA SECTION-1
CAMERA SECTION-2
SYSCON SECTION
SERVO SECTION
AUDIO SECTION
VIDEO SECTION
LCD SECTION
POWER
CARD
PLAY
VCR
OFFMOVIEP.SCANCARD
REC
( DIG
ITAL
MEC
HANI
CAL C
HASS
IS II
)D
MC
II
MAINCHASSIS
DRUMMOTOR
LOADINGMOTOR
SLIDECHASSIS
VIDEOHEAD
2
20
1 12
3130
19
CN1001CN1000
CN1002
CN4101
BACKLIGHT
EXP
FOCUS
CN4102
FN4101
20P
25P
10P
2P
8P
4P
EJECT SW
MIC UNIT
ZOOMSW
UNIT
2241
1
1
1
10
4
2
25 CN11
CN92CN93
CN91
CN15
CN13
CN14
CN12SD CONNECTOR
SD P.C.B.
SD or MMC
SPEAKER
MAIN DIAL
MULTI P.C.B.
LI P.C.B.
1
1
1 8
2
3940
6CN701
IC801AIF
MAIN DIAL
MENUSW
IC1101DIC4
IC1401CAMERAMI-COM
IC4003SIC
IC4001V53
IC100MAIN
MI-COM
IC2100VIF2
CN3302IC203SUB
MI-COM
IC1502EVF DRIVER
IC2301VIC2
CN3201
CN2000
CN101
CN100
CN1502
CN1401 CN200 CN102
CN1301
CN1402
CN1501
IC3201DC/DC
CONVERTERCONTROL
DCJACK
AV JACK
IC3202DC/DC
CONVERTERCONTROL
CN3301
IC902LCD DRIVER
CN801
CN802
AUDIO P.C.B.
R-KEY UNIT
MAIN P.C.B.
BATTERY TERMINAL
LCD P.C.B.
HALL IC
BACK LIGHT
LCD
JACK FPC
CCD P.C.B. CA P.C.B.
CVF P.C.B.
LCD
1
11 2
27 26
6
26CN903CN901
WP4201 WP4202
CN902
1 8CN1
REMOTE MIC
DUCKING UNIT
1
1
1 2
16
2
2120
1 2
19 20
1101
128
1415
8
IC1601PITCH
SENSORCN302
IC300MOTORDRIVE
IC1601YAW
SENSOR
RU01RECEIVER
(REMOTE CONTROLLER)
SUB P.C.B.
50
33
1
11
1
1
5
1
10
51
2 1
CN304
CN303
CN301
CN300
12
2726
1314
12
1
25 24
1 2
27 26
1 2 3940
12
1 2
6 5
20
1
19
22120
12
3130
21
112
27261
27 26
10
SUB-DMC FPC U
1 2
29 30
LENS UNIT
LCD UNIT
ZOOM MOTOR
FOCUS MOTOR
FOCUS SENS
ZOOM SENS
TEMP SENS
IG METER
33P
51P
5P
27P
26P
40P
6P
20P
20P
31P5P27P6P
31P
16P
21P
26P40P
6P
27P
26P
8P
8P
10P
10P
28P
25P
10P
14P10P
11P
30P FPC
5P FPC
11P FPC
10P FPC
10P FPC
10P
4P
2P
Metal contact (Pins' face down)
Metal contact (Pins' face up)
Metal contact Metal contact
:
:
TP2002SWP TP2001
PB-RF
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
CANON INC. 2001C01 Sep. 2001
CN112345678BT11BT21
GNDGNDLI 3VSTART/STOP SWPAE/GREENMO5VVTR POWER LEDCAM POWER LED
LI+
LI GND
LI P.C.B.
CN4101123456789
101112131415161718192021
CN4102123456789
10111213141516
FN410112
GNDGNDBL 5VBL 5VCOMGRBBLKHCK1HCK2HSTRGTDWNENSTBVCKVSTVSSVDDVDD
VDDVSSVSTVCKTEST2 (STB)ENTEST1 (DWN)RGTHSTHCK2HCK1BLKBRGCOM
BL 5VLED
CVF P.C.B.
CN901123456CN902
123456789101112131415161718192021222324252627CN903
1234567891011121314151617181920212223242526
PNL BT SWV GNDLCD 3VPNL OPEN SWV GNDLCD 3V
PANEL RPANEL GPANEL BGNDGNDC SYNCSCLK1SOUT1SIN1LCD EEP CSLCD CENPNL OPEN SWPNL BT SWLCD ONLCD BL DNLCD 12VCOM ADJPLL ADJLCD 3VLCD 3VLCD UNREGLCD UNREGLCD UNREGGNDGNDGNDNC
NCCKH1CKH2PCGXPCGHVDDSTHXSTHHVSSCSHGRBPCDNCCSVVVDDENBXENBVVSSSTVXSTVCKV1CKV2COMNC
LCD P.C.B.
CN1000123456789
1011121314151617181920
CCD OUTV2BGNDV2AH2V3BH1V3A+15VV1RGV4GNDGND-7.5VSUBNCNCNCNC
CCD P.C.B.
CN9112345678910111213141516171819202122232425262728CN92
12345678C93
12345678910
GNDEXT MIC LEXT MIC RGNDGNDHP COMHP LHP RGNDGNDGNDGNDGNDGNDLANC OUTLANC DCGNDHP DETEXT DETS DETC I/OGNDY I/OGNDGNDGNDGNDGND
GNDEXT MIC LEXT MIC RGNDGNDHP COMHP LHP R
LANC OUTLANC DCGNDHP DETEXT DETS DETC I/OGNDY I/OGND
MULTI P.C.B.
CN701123456CN801
12345678910111213141516171819202122232425262728293031323334353637383940CN802
12345678
GNDLchRchGNDCchGND
GNDGNDGNDGNDAUDIO RAUDIO LA 3VA 3VGNDGNDAUD IGNDAMCLKAUD OLACKWCKGNDGNDGNDGNDSP -SP +VTR UNREGVTR UNREGSCLK2SOUT2DVDD3VAIF CSA EMP1XPD DABEEP LEVSHUTTER1BEEP2BEEP1XPD ADA MUTEAUD ONA EMP2DVDD4.7VEXT CONT
M GNDM LchM RchM GNDM GNDHP COMHP LchHP Rch
AUDIO P.C.B.
CN1001123456789
1011121314151617181920
CN1002123456789
10111213141516171819202122232425262728293031
V2BCCD OUTV2AGNDV3BH2V3AH1V1+15VV4RGGNDGNDSUB-7.5VNCNCNCNC
GNDGNDGNDCAM 4.7VCAM 3VCAM 3V36M+15V-7.5VTG NP SELXTG SENVGATEHDVDFIDXTG RSTDSPCLKCAM SCLKCAM SDOXAGC CSD9D8D7D6D5D4D3D2D1D0D0
CA P.C.B.
CN11123456789
10111213141516171819202122232425
CN12123456789
101112
CN131234CN14123456789
10CN1512
MMC RSVMMC CMDGNDMMC VDDMMC CLKCARD DETMMC DATLAC OUTGNDGNDSP +SP -PAE/GREENSTART/STOP SWMAIN SW0MAIN SW1MAIN SW2AD KEY2CARD PR0MO 5VVTR POWER LEDLANC DCCAM POWER LEDLI 3VLI 3V
MMC RSVMMC CMDGNDMMC VDDMMC CLKGNDMMC DATMMC DAT1MMC DAT2CARD PROGNDCARD DET
MAIN SW1MAIN SW2GNDMAIN SW0
CAM POWER LEDVTR POWER LEDMO 5VPAE/GREENSTART/STOP SWLI 3VGNDGNDEXPFOCUS
SP -SP +
MMC P.C.B.
CN300123456789
10CN301123456789
1011
CN30212345CN303123456789
101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233
CN304123456789
101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233343536373839404142434445464748495051
MIC1MIC2C INMIC3GNDREC PRFTR CTR LED ATR LED KTR E
WWCOIL COMGNDSENS COMDPGDFGVVUU
LOAD (+)LOAD (-)NCGNDDEW
WWVVSR LED KSR LED ASR CSR EGNDCFG2GNDCFG1CFG VCCBOT EB EOT CEOT EMSW SENSMSW VCCMSW VSSLED KLED AGNDW+W-H-UUGNDH+V+V-U+U-
DEWGNDGNDMIC ONMIC3MIC2MIC1LMO CONTUNLOADLOADDVDD 3VDVDD 3VDA SREELMO 5VVTR UNREGCAS INDPGDFGDRUM ONDRUM VSDRUM VSREEL LED CONTS REEL FGT REEL FGSELECSLPTAPE LEDCAP FWOCAP VSCAP VSCFGCAP ONDA CFGREC PROOFTAPE ENDTAPE TOPGNDGNDMSW ADTALLY LEDRMC INDVDD 4.7VGNDI SWY OFFSETY GYROCAM GNDCAM GNDP OFFSETP GYROCAM 3VCAM 3V
SUB P.C.B.
CN100123456789
101112131415161718192021222324252627
CN101123456789
10111213141516171819202122232425
CN10212345CN200123456789
101112131415161718192021222324252627
CN1301123456789
1011121314151617181920
CN1401123456
CAN 3VP GYROP OFFSETGNDGNDY GYROY OFFSETI SWGNDDVDD 4.7VRMC INTALLY LEDMSW ADGNDGNDTAPE TOPTAPE ENDREC PROOFDA CFGCAP ONCFGCAP VSCAP VSCAP FWDTAPE LEDSELCSLPSELCSLP
T REEL FGS REEL FGREEL LED CONTDRUM VSDRUM VSDRUM ONDFGDPGCAS INVTR UNREGMO 5VDA SPEELDVDD 3VDVDD 3VLOADUNLOADLMO CONTMIC1MIC2MIC3MIC ONGNDGNDDEWDEW
AD KEY1DVDD 3VAD KEY0NCGND
LI 3VCAM POWER LEDLANC DCVTR POWER LEDMO 5VCARD PROAD KEY2MAIN SW2MAIN SW1MAIN SW0START/STOP SWPAE/GREENSP -SP +GNDGNDLANC OUTMMC DATMMC VSS2MMC CLKMMC VDDGNDMMC CMDMMC RSVGNDEJECT SWEJECT SW
DRIVE (-)HALL OUT (-)ZOOM BHALL IN (-)ZOOM AHALL OUT (+)ZOOM-AHALL IN (+)ZOOM-BDRIVE (+)TM SENSFOCUS LEDZOOM SENSFOCUS AZOOM LEDFOCUS-AVCCFOCUS-BFOCUS SENSFOCUS B
PHOTOGNDH PHOTOGNDZOOM ADCK 3V
MAIN P.C.B.
CN330112345678910111213141516171819202122232425262728293031323334353637383940CN3302
123456789101112131415161718192021222324252627
GNDGNDGNDGNDAUDIO RAUDIO LA 3VA 3VGNDGNDAUD IGNDAMCLKAUD OLRCKWCKGNDGNDGNDGNDSP -SP +VTR UNREGVTR UNREGSCLK2SOUT2DVDD 3VAIF CSA EMP1XPD DABEEP LEVSHUTTER 1BEEP 2BEEP 1XPD ADA MUTEAUD ONA EMP2DVDD 4.7VEXT CONT
XTPAXTPBTPBTPAGNDGNDAUDIO RGNDGNDGNDAUDIO LGNDPLUG INV I/OGNDGNDY I/OGNDGNDC I/OS DETEXT DETHP DETGNDLANC DC LANC OUTNC
MAIN P.C.B.
CN1402123456789
10111213141516171819202122232425262728293031
CN1501123456789
101112131415161718192021
CN1502123456789
101112131415161718192021222324252627
CN2000123456789
10CN3201123456789
1011121314
D0D1D2D3D4D5D6D7D8D9XAGC CSCAM SDOCAM SCLKDSPCLKXTG RSTFIDVDHDVGATEXTG SENTG NP SELCCD -7.5VCCD 15V36MCAM 3VCAM 3VCAM 4.7VGNDGNDGNDGND
VDDVSSVSTVCKSTBENDWNRGTHSTHCK2HCK1BLKBRGCOMBL 5VBL 5VGNDGNDNC
GNDGNDGNDLCD UNREGLCD UNREGLCD UNREGLCD 3VLCD 3VPLL ADJCOM ADJLCD 12VLCD BL ONLCD ONPNL BT SWPNL OPEN SWLCD CENLCD EEP CSSIN1SOUT1SCLK1C SYNCGNDGNDPANEL BPANEL GPANEL RNC
HA GNDH1AH1BHA GNDH2AH2BHA GNDH3AH3BHA GND
BATT -BATT -BATT -BATT -BATT -BATT -BATT INFO ADBATT E3BATT +BATT +BATT +BATT +BATT +BATT +
MAIN P.C.B.
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
8
16
6
2
1
4
3
7
14
15
10
12
9SDO
SCK
75
6 810
9 1412
13
11.5V
3
2
7
46
5
13
2
SDO
SCK
XTG SEN
TG NP SEL
HD
V GATE
FID
VD
CAM 3V
CAM 3V
CAM 3V
CAM 3V
8
CAM 3V
CAM 3V
CAM 3V
CAM 3V CAM 4.7V
CAM 4.7V
CAM 4.7V
CAM 3V
5 14
4
6 12
32
1
5
42
1
5
42
1
8
72
1
36
5
4
5
Z RSTF RST
LED RETIRIS GAINTM SENS
DA LOAD
I ENC
SDO2
SCK TAD
IC1304mPD16877MA
MOTOR DRIVE
IC1303(2/2)
IC1302(3/3)
IC1302(2/3)
IC1303NJM3414AV
OPE AMP(1/2)
IC1302LMV324MTOPE AMP
(1/3)
IC1404MB88347LPFV
D/A CONVERTER(EVR)
IC1003HD49325BHFCDS/AGC/AD
IC1001CXD2488AR
TIMING GENERATOR
IC1000ICX250AQ
CCD
IC1009TC7SH08FU
IC1006TC7WH08FU
IC1005TLC2933IPW
IC1008TC7SET08FU
IC1007TC7SET08FU
DRIVE(+ )
TM SENSZOOM LED
VCC
CN130110171115
FOCUS LEDHALL IN(- )
12481
HALL IN(+ )DRIVE(- )
HALL OUT(- )HALL OUT(+ )
FOCUS A
FOCUS SENS
FOCUS B
ZOOM-AZOOM B
FOCUS-A
ZOOM SENS
FOCUS-B
ZOOM-B
ZOOM A
265739
141620181913
CCD OUT
V1V2A
VSUB
CN10001
16104
V2BV3A
286
12V3BV4H1H2
+15V-7.5V
RG
75
119
15
CCD OUT
V1V2A
VSUB
CN10012
1593
V2BV3A
175
11V3BV4H1H2
+15V
CCD +15V
-7.5V
CCD -7.5V
RG
86
121016
VOUT
Q1000Q1001
SUB
V1
V2A
V2B
V3A
V3B
V4
H1
H2
RG
VDD
VL
OUT4A
OUT3B
OUT3A VDD
IN3
IN4
IN1
IN2
EN1
EN2
13ZA
ZB
FA
FB
F PSB
Z PSB
24
15
9
11
10
12
EN3 14
EN4 16
VM1 1
VM4 8
5
19
7
OUT4B17
OUT1A2
IE2
IE1
OFFSET2 A3V
D3V
LD
SCK
D1
8
9
12
13
14
10
4
5
OFFSET6
DRIVE7
OUT1B23
OUT2A4
OUT2B
ZOOM B
ZOOM-A
ZOOM A
ZOOM-B
FOCUS A
FOCUS-A
FOCUS B
FOCUS-B21
SUB
V2A
V3A
V4
H1
V1
V2B
V3B
H2
RG
SHD
SHP
PB OBP
DUM
C
DVDD
15
AVDD
31
AVDD
41
AVDD
38
DVDD
46CAM 4.7V
+15VCAM3V
-7.5V
CAM 4.7V
CAM 3V+15V
CAM 3V
-7.5VD0D1D2D3D4
D9XAGC CS
SDO
D6D7
SCKCLK 36M
D8
D5
DSPCLKTG NP SELXTG SENV GATE
HDVDFID
XTG RST
45689
302928272625242322212019187
1710111213141516
MO 5V
CN1002TOCAMERA SECTION-2MAIN P.C.B.CN1402
CAM 3V
SDATA 45
SCLK 44
CS 43
D2 4
D1 3
D0
SEN
HDI
FID
NTSC/PAL
V GATE
VDI
SSI
CKI
SSCK
RST
MCKO
2
D5 7
D4 6
D3 5
D8
D910
11
D7
D6 8
9
20 17 23
ADCK
161819
26 CDSCCDOUT
A/D
CONTROL
AGC
AVD1
AVD2
DSG
ATE
VDD2
VDD1
SHD
PBLK
CLPD
M
SHP
OBP
7
6
30
32
36
27
28
29
3
25
34
33
13
40
9
12
46
47
43
44
39
41
4 48 24
VH
42
VL
+15V-7.5V
VccVcc
VccVcc
Vcc
Vcc
Vcc
451614
21 15 341718
TIMINGGENERATOR
CONTROL
1/2
VCOPD
LPF
C1042,R1031
Q1301
Q1302
Q1302
ZOOMRESET
TEMPSENSOR
FOCUSMOTOR
IGMETER
ZOOMMOTOR
CCD
TOCAMERA SECTION-2MAIN P.C.B.IC1401
FROMCAMERA SECTION-2MAIN P.C.B.IC1401
FROMCAMERA SECTION-2MAIN P.C.B.IC1401
FROMCAMERA SECTION-2MAIN P.C.B.IC1104
TOCAMERA SECTION-2MAIN P.C.B.IC1105
TOCAMERA SECTION-2MAIN P.C.B.IC1401
FOCUSRESET
ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL
DIGITAL VIDEO SIGNAL
DATA COMMUNICATION
MAIN P.C.B.
CA P.C.B.
CCD P.C.B.
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
-
CAMERA SECTION-1 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
CANON INC. 2001C01 Sep. 2001
IC1101F722504D
DIC 4
IC1301TK11140S
REGULATER
IC1105TC7WH08FK
IC1104TC7WH08FK
IC1401M31011MB
CAMERA MI-COM
IC1402PST596JNR
RESET
IC1403AK6416AMEEPROM
IC100 (2/3)
MAIN MI-COM
DM-IXY DV2ELURA20 MC ADM-MV4i MC E
ELURA10 ADM-MV4 EDM-MV4i E
M32120MCWGD52A MC32120MCWGD52B
IC1102MB81F161622C
SDRAM
DM-IXY DV2ELURA20 MC ADM-MV4i MC EONLY
ELURA10 ADM-MV4 EDM-MV4i EONLY
IC4000MBM29LV800BA
8MFLASH
IC4001UPD70236AGC
V53
IC1605TC75W51FU
OPE AMP
IC4003KS4MOU1298MBP
SIC
IC4002MB81F161622C
SDRAM
IC1603(1/2)TC7W66FU
SWITCH
IC1602ENC 03JB
YAW SENSOR
IC1601ENC 03JA
PITCH SENSOR
IC1603(2/2)
137 139138 140 143142 144 145 148147 149 115114 116 119117 120 122121 124 127125 128 130129 131 132 2 9 1211 39 42403 65 8 43 4645 48 1949 20 2221 23 27 3124 28 3029
DM-IXY DV2ELURA20 MC ADM-MV4i MC EONLY
Vcc
OUT VC
Vcc
OUT VC21
75
3
6
8Vcc
Vcc
51
4
35
6
71
2
8Vcc
35
6
71
2
8Vcc
5 6
3
MMC P.C.B.(1/2)
ZOOM SW UNIT
SUB P.C.B.(1/2)
MAIN P.C.B.
MMC
MMC VSS2CN200
19
MMC DAT
21 MMC VDD24 MMC RSV1823 MMC CMD20 MC CLK
CARD DETCN12
12
MMC DAT
4 MMC VDD1 MMC RSV72 MMC CMD5 MC CLK
CARD DETCN11
6
MMC DAT
4MMC VDD1MMC RSV72MMC CMD5
19MC CLK
6 CARD PRO10 CARD PRO CARD PRO
DQM
155
MEM CNT0 151
VDD
DVDD 3V
1
VDD 25
VDDQ 38
VDDQ 44
VDDQ 50
FM CLK
MEM CNT3
152
156
113
17
RESEVE 1 149
SIC CS 14
RESEVE 2 78
RESEVE 3 159
SIC REQ 148
SIC PSB 12
SIC BBUSSEL 11
SIC RESET 10
MMC ON 13
MMC DET 196
CARD PRO 197
16
18
17
15
35
14
CH1 OUT5 98
VDD S1 33
VDD S4 101
VDD S5 126
VDD S6 157
VDD S7 168
CH1 OUT0 92
CH1 OUT1 93
CH1 OUT2 94
CH1 OUT3 95
CH1 OUT4 97
CH2 1 103
CH2 2 104
CH2 3 105
CH2 4 106
CH2 5 107
CH2 6 110
CH2 7 111
CH2 0 102
F MODE 4 170
FI OUT 85
VD OUT 41
MCL KEN 5
XSYSRST 159
F MODE 1 172
F MODE 2 174
F MODE 0 169
C to M DATA 86
M to C SCLK 84
M to C DATA 85
DIC
TDI
104
AVCC
182
VCCP
157
VCCP
140
VCCB
130
VCCP
101
VCCP
88
VCCP
56
VCCB
48
VCCB
34
VCC
B
16
VCCV
1
6
TMS
105
TCK
109
D to C DATA 93
C to D DATA 94
DIC SCLK 92
FIC CS 40
DIC CS 39
PWM CS 41
SHUTTER1 72
DIC READ 42
ZOOM KEY 188
CAM REQ 145
CAM DIC RST 27
CAM RX 38
CAM CS 36
CAM SS TMG1 132
CAM SS TMG2
SI
131
183
DIC4 RST DET 37
1843
CS
RAS
WE
36 UDQM
CAS
LDQM
CLK
29 ADIN0
ADIN1
ADIN2
ADIN3
ADIN4
ADIN5
ADIN6
ADIN7
ADIN8
31
30
32
35
34
37
ADIN9
39
38
40
DIC2S CS96
DIC2S I /F CONT95
DIC2S FI53
DIC2S VD152
MCL KEN164
DIC XSYSRST153
CAM/DIC/SIC SCK97
CAM/DIC/SIC SO99
CAM/SIC SI98
CAM REQ156
CAM DIC RST198
CAM CS154
CAM RX52
CAM SS TMG154
CAM SS TMG255
CAM M RST136
LED RET21
DA LOAD14
I ENC187
Z PSB23
F PSB22
Z RES SW25
F RES SW24
XTG RST13
SDI098
SDO099
SCLK097
XEEP CS31
X EEP WP32
EEP RB
Vcc
33
XVD143
XAGC CS15
FID43
IRIS GAIN20
TM SENS189
49 103
SCK
164
SDO
SDI
XCE
3
XCE
2
XCE
1
READ
86165
JTAG
TCK
180
JTAG
TDI
177
JTAG
TMS
176
JTAG
TDO
175
NT X
PL S
EL
Y G
YRO
P G
YRO
I SW
180
VCCR
150
VCC
124
PLL
VCC
120
OCS
VCC
100
VCC
1
VCC
X OUT
RESE
T
X IN
DQ0
DQ15 A0A0
HALF PHOTO SW
PHOTO SW
AA M00
M0
F AA
VDDQ
VDDQ
VDDQ
VDD
VDD
TGCLK77
C1112,R1117C1113,R1118
IC1106,X1101
PD141
MCLK
VICCLK
HD
VD
FI
72
PWM FB79
PWM FA76
PWM ZB82
PWM ZA80
87
27
20
26
SCLK280
TOCAMERA SECTION-1MAIN P.C.B.
TOCAMERA SECTION-1MAIN P.C.B.IC1304
TOCAMERA SECTION-1MAIN P.C.B.CN1301-13,19pin
TOCAMERA SECTION-1MAIN P.C.B.IC1404-13,14pin
SDO282
V GATE16
XTG SEN12
TG NP SEL11
FROM SS SECTION (MAIN P.C.B.)
TO VIDEO SECTION (MAIN P.C.B.)
10
121
OUT IN
118
123
+15V
CAM 3V
MO 5V
CAM 3V
CAM 3V
-7.5V
CAM 3V
P GYROI SW
Y GYRO
CN1001628
CAM 3V
P GYROI SW
Y GYRO
CN304
50CAM 3V51
454943
CAM 3V
CAM 3V
H PHOTOPHOTO
ZOOM AD
CN14016
T
W
531
CAM 4.7VTOCAMERA SECTION-1CA P.C.B.CN1002 CAM 3V
+15V
CAM 3V
-7.5VD0D1D2D3D4
D9XAGC CSCAM SDO
D6D7
CAM SCK
CAM SDOCAM SCK
CAM SCK
CAM SDO
CLK 36M
D8
D5
DSPCLKTG NP SELXTG SENV GATE
HDVDFID
XTG RST
2726252322123456789
10111213241421201918171615
CN1402
CH1 OUT6 99
CH1 OUT7 100
3
2
X140120MHz
1
54
3
SO 4
SCK 2
WP 6
CS 1
R/B 7
2
57
56
FMCE
DRMX A00
DRMX A01
DRMX A02
DRMX A03
DRMX A04
DRMX A05
DRMX A06
DRMX A07
DRMX A08
DRMX A09
DRMX A10
DRMX A11
CAS
RAS
DRWL
DRMDQMU
DRMDQML
DRMXCKE
DRMXCLK
FMOE
FMWE
X IN
140
GP1
16
GP2
120
GP3
124
SB REQ
125
SB SD0
160
PW SAVE
161
BBUSSEL
170
RESET1
171
SB SCK
172
SB SDI
173
SB SE
174
TCK
175
TDI
23
TMS
24
25
TRST
TDO
26
27
CHV A0151
CHV A1152
CHV A2153
CHV A3154
CHV A4155
CHV A5157
CHV A6158
CHV A7
ADATA0ADATA1ADATA2ADATA3
DIC 1.7V+15V-7.5V
CARD 3V
ADATA4ADATA5ADATA6ADATA7
159
CHV B0141
CHV B1142
CHV B2143
CHV B3144
CHV B4145
CHV B5146
CHV B6
CHV B7
BDATA0BDATA1BDATA2BDATA3BDATA4BDATA5BDATA6BDATA7
147
148
MC DT118
MC CMO
MC CLK
117
116
VDD11
VDD321
VDD440
VDD554
VDD666
VDD767
VDD982
VDD1090
VDD1198
VDD12107
VDD13112
VDD14121
VDD15130
VDD8
VDD16
68
131
VDD17139
VDD18
VDD19
156
176
CHD A0162
CHD A1163
CHD A2164
CHD A3165
CHD A4166
CHD A5167
CHD A6168
CHD A7169
CHD B0132
CHD B1133
CHD N2134
CHD N3135
CHD B4136
CHD B5137
CHD B6138
95
96
101
97
100
102
103
34
35
36
37
38
39
48
49
50
51
52
53
62
63
64
65
CXD00
CXD01
CXD02
CXD03
CXD04
CXD05
CXD06
CXD07
CXD08
CXD09
CXD10
CXD11
CXD12
CXD13
CXD14
CXD15
CXA00
CXA01
CXA02
CXA03
CXA04
CXA05
CXA06
CXA07
CXA08
CXA09
CXA10
CXA11
CXA12
CXA13
28
29
28
30
31
32
33
42
43
44
45
46
47
56
57
CXA14
CXA15
CXA16
CXA17
CXA18
CXA19
58
59
60
61
72
73
BCYST
CPUCKI
DSTB
HLDAK
MXIO
RXW
UBE
JPHACK
JPHRD
JPHWR
QINT
JPHREQ
RESETO
READY
5
6
5
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
20
115
111
110
HLDRQ
CPUMCK
CONIRQ
BS16
109
106
105
104
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
84
85
86
87
88
89
92
CHD B7
DVDD3V
CARD 3V
DVDD
CARD 3V
CARD 3V
CARD 3V
36MHz
LPF
VCXO
CAM 3V
(NTSC) (PAL)
CAM 3V
CAM 2.3VCAM 3V
CAM 3V
CAM 3V
CAM 3V
CARD 3V
DQ0
DQ1
DQ2
DQ3
DQ4
DQ5
DQ6
DQ7
DQ8
DQ9
DQ10
DQ11
DQ12
DQ13
DQ14
LDQM
36
CKE
14
CLK
34
35
A021
A122
A223
A324
A427
A528
A629
A730
A831
A932
A1020
A1119
/CAS16
/RAS17
/WE15
39
40
42
43
45
46
48
49DQ15
125133844
2
3
5
6
8
9
11
12
UDQM
XWE
XOE
11
XCE
28
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
8
7
6
A115
A124
A133
A142
A151
A1648
A17
A18
17
16
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
37
29
31
33
35
38
40
42
44
30
32
DQ0
DQ1
DQ2
DQ3
DQ4
DQ5
DQ6
DQ7
DQ8
DQ9
DQ10
DQ11
DQ12
DQ13
DQ14
DQ15
VCC
34
36
39
41
43
45
91
92
93
94
97
98
99
100
101
102
104
105
106
107
109
110
111
112
113
A19114
A20117
BCYST61
CLKOUT
XDSTB
46
62
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A0
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
12
55
56
64
3
58
57
17
2
51
40
11
49
17
42
HLDRQ
X1
INTP3
XBS8/BS16
HLDAK
M/XIO
R/XW
XUBE
XDMAAKO
XIORD
XIOWR
INTP3
DMARQO
XRESET
XREADY
71
72
74
75
76
77
79
80
81
82
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
83
84
83
87
88
89
90
18
48
66
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
VDD
78
86
96
108
118
VIC VD19Q4001
Q4000
Q4002
Q4003
Q101
Q102
Q103
Q104
CAM 3V
CAM 3V
CAM 2.3V
DVDD 3V
DIC 1.7V
+15V
7.5V
CARD 3V
2 1
7
8
4 2
1
4 2
1
TCK27M
SHUTTER1
VIC VD
VIC TDOTMS
T RST
CAM ONCAM 3V
CAM 2.3VDVDD 3V
ZOOM
PHOTO
DRM A(0)
DRM A(1)
DRM A(2)
DRM A(3)
DRM A(4)
DRM A(5)
DRM A(6)
DRM A(7)
DRM A(8)
DRM A(9)
DRM A(10)
DRM A(11)
DRM A(0)
DRM A(1)
DRM A(2)
DRM A(3)
DRM A(4)
DRM A(5)
DRM A(6)
DRM A(7)
DRM A(8)
DRM A(9)
DRM A(10)
DRM A(11)
CPU D(0)
CPU D(1)
CPU D(2)
CPU D(3)
CPU D(4)
CPU D(5)
CPU D(6)
CPU D(7)
CPU D(8)
CPU D(9)
CPU D(10)
CPU D(11)
CPU D(12)
CPU D(13)
CPU D(14)
CPU D(15)
CPU A(1)
CPU A(2)
CPU A(3)
CPU A(4)
CPU A(5)
CPU A(6)
CPU A(7)
CPU A(8)
CPU A(9)
CPU A(10)
CPU A(11)
CPU A(12)
CPU A(13)
CPU A(14)
CPU A(15)
CPU A(16)
CPU A(17)
CPU A(18)
CPU A(20)
CPU A(0)
CPU A(1)
CPU A(2)
CPU A(3)
CPU A(4)
CPU A(5)
CPU A(6)
CPU A(7)
CPU A(8)
CPU A(9)
CPU D(0)
CPU D(1)
CPU D(2)
CPU D(3)
CPU D(4)
CPU D(5)
CPU D(6)
CPU D(7)
CPU D(8)
CPU D(9)
CPU D(10)
CPU D(11)
CPU D(12)
CPU D(13)
CPU D(14)
CPU D(15)
CPU D(0)
CPU D(1)
CPU D(2)
CPU D(3)
CPU D(4)
CPU D(5)
CPU D(6)
CPU D(7)
CPU D(8)
CPU D(9)
CPU D(10)
CPU D(11)
CPU D(12)
CPU D(13)
CPU D(14)
CPU D(15)
CPU A(0)
CPU A(1)
CPU A(2)
CPU A(3)
CPU A(4)
CPU A(5)
CPU A(6)
CPU A(7)
CPU A(8)
CPU A(9)
CPU A(10)
CPU A(11)
CPU A(12)
CPU A(13)
CPU A(14)
CPU A(15)
CPU A(16)
CPU A(17)
CPU A(18)
CPU A(19)
CPU A(20)
CPU A(10)
CPU A(11)
CPU A(12)
CPU A(13)
CPU A(14)
CPU A(15)
CPU A(16)
CPU A(17)
CPU A(18)
CPU A(19)
CPU D(0)
CPU D(1)
CPU D(2)
CPU D(3)
CPU D(4)
CPU D(5)
CPU D(6)
CPU D(7)
CPU D(8)
CPU D(9)
CPU D(10)
CPU D(11)
CPU D(12)
CPU D(13)
CPU D(14)
CPU D(15)
RESERVE 1
RESERVE 2
RESERVE 3
SIC REQ
SIC PSB
SIC CS
SIC BBUSSEL
SIC RESET
MMC ON
MMC DET
CARD PRO
RESERVE 3
SIC REQ
SIC PSB
SIC BBUSSEL
SIC RESET
SIC TO M
SIC CS
SIC SCK
M TO SIC
TCK
VIC TDO
TMS
T RST
27M
SIC TDO
RESERVE 1
RESERVE 2
ADATA0
ADATA1
ADATA2
ADATA3
ADATA4
ADATA5
ADATA6
ADATA7
BDATA0
BDATA1
BDATA2
BDATA3
BDATA4
BDATA5
BDATA6
BDATA7ADATA0
ADATA1
ADATA2
ADATA3
ADATA4
ADATA5
ADATA6
ADATA7
BDATA0
BDATA1
BDATA2
BDATA3
BDATA4
BDATA5
BDATA6
BDATA7
CAM SCKM to C
C to M
SIC SCKM TO SICSIC TO M
CAM SCK
M to C
C to M
ZB
ZA
FB
FA
CAM 3V
TCKTMS
SIC TDO
DIGITAL VIDEO SIGNALDATA COMMUNICATIONCAMERA SECTION-2 ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
CANON INC. 2001C01 Sep. 2001
DRUM SERVO SIGNAL
CAPSTAN SERVO SIGNAL
MAIN P.C.B.
IC3203TK71548S
4.7V REGULATOR
IC3219TK1128S
2.8V REGULATOR
IC101S-80928AMP
R KEY FPC
IC100 (1/3)
MAIN MI-COM
DM-IXY DV2ELURA20 MC ADM-MV4i MC E
M32120MCWGD52AELURA10 ADM-MV4 EDM-MV4i E
MC32120MCWGD52B
REG. LPF
LPF
LPF
1 IN OUT 2
3
Q3202REGULATOR
2
1
1
1
1
3
456
CCD -7.5V
CCD 15V
LCD 12V
LPF
LPF
LPF
LPF
LPF
LPF
LPF
MO 5V
VTR UNREG
LPF DVDD 4.7V
HA 4.7V
5 INON
OUT 4
1
DIF 3V
HA 3V
DVDD 3V
A 3V
CARD 3V
LCD 3V
LPF
LPF
DIC 1.7V
DVDD 1.7V
LPF
LPF
Q3227
AVDD 2.3V
DVDD 2.3V
LPF CAM 2.3V
LPF
Q3227
Q3205Q3201SW
CAM 3VBATTERY
PACK
SW4
SW5
SW6
SW2
SW3
DVDD 3V
PLAY/PAUSE
REC.P
SW1STOP
FF
DE ON/OFF
REW
AD KEY1CN1
1AD KEY0 3DVDD 3V 2
AD KEY1CN102
1AD KEY03DVDD 3V2
CAM 3VCAM 2.3VDVDD 3VDIC 1.7V
+ 15V- 7.5V
CARD 3V
VTR UNREGE 3V
DVDD 1.7VLCD 3V
LCD 12VAVDD 2.3V
A 3VHA 4.7VHA 3V
DVDD 4.7VDVDD 3V
DIF 3V
DA CFGDA S REEL
LCD ONLCD BL ONEVF BL ON
REC CTL
BATT INFO
E 3V
CAM 3V
VTR UNREGE 3VDVDD 1.7VLCD 3VLCD 12VAVDD 2.3VA 3VHA 4.7VHA 3VDVDD 4.7VDVDD 3VDIF 3V
CAM 2.3VDVDD 3VDIC 1.7V+ 15V- 7.5VCARD 3V
CN32017
+BD-
BATT E38BATT +14BATT +13BATT +12BATT +11BATT +10BATT +9BATT -6BATT -5BATT -4BATT -3BATT -2BATT 1
CH1
IC3201MB3825APFF
DC/DC CONVERTORCONTROL
39
46
CH2
36
50
CH3
33
56
CH4
19
57
CH5
16
64
CH6
11
410
CERR
15
14
21
19
1613
11
10
3
VCC
6 ON/OFFOUT 1
OUT 2
OUT 3
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
30
29
9 VCC
21SW F
14 VCC
28 VCC
51 VCC
63 VCC
42 VCC
DERR
DSC
ON/OFF
4
OSC
Q3209Q3213L3217
Q3212L3216
Q3211Q3214L3218
REG.
CAM ON
Q3208
Q3210
Q3210
REG.
IC3202AN8049FHN
DC/DC COVETORCONTROL
Q3216REGULATOR
2 3
456
1
Q3206REGULATOR
2 3
456
1
Q3207REGULATOR
2 3
5 46
Q3204REGULATOR
2 3
456
Q3203REGULATOR
2 3
456
SW F
DVDD 3V
IC202TL 1596CPW
LANC INTERFACE
4
PW C
ONT
8
VCC
VTRUNREG
Q204E 3V
Q202
Q202
12
10
1
DATACONT
LIMITER5.6VREG
Q105SWITCH
137
180
174DRUM ON
1501001
DVDD 2.3V
DVDD 3V
182
AVCC
140
VCCP
101
VCCP
88
VCCP
66
VCCP
130
VCCB
48
VCCB
34
VCCB
16
VCCB
6
VCCB
157
VCCP
169CAP ON
171CAP FWD
175SELCSLP
168LMO CONT
166UNLOAD
165LOAD
193MSW A/D
183DEW DETECT
172TAPE LED
176REEL LED CONT
63REC PROOF SW
62CASSETTE IN SW
192TAPE END A/D
191TAPE TOP A/D
190T REEL FG
189S REEL FG
186KEY AD2
59PAE/GREEN SW
58START/STOP
91MAIN EEPROM CS
92OSDC/EEPROM/DA SCK
93OSDC/EEPROM/DA SO
94SOUT1
X OUT
121
191174 PWMD
DVDD 3V
AVDD 2.3V
VCC
VCC
VCC
DIF 3V
PWMC151
RFGT
172RFGS
T REEL FG
S REEL FG
153DFG
130DPG
132CFG
1
2
3
1
2
3
X IN
123
CAM PW ON
184 KEY AD0
185 KEY AD1
DIAL CCW
DIAL CW
EXECUTE187 KEY AD3
65 DIAL CCW SW
64 DIAL CW SW
146 SUB REQ
147 SUB CS
84 AIF/VIF/SUB SCK
85 SUB SI
86
SCK
SI
SOAIF/VIF/SUB SO
118 RESET IN
82 LANC OUT
81 LONC IN
RESET
IC801AUDIO INTERFACE
IC2100VIF 2
(AV SECTION)
DVDD 3V
2 1
3
IC2301MBG102
VIC2
TALLY LED 29
VTR UNREG42BATT AD
20CAS IN
23LI3 DET
30MIC ON
37MIC3
10MIC SCL
38MIC2
11MIC SDA
39MIC1
4E3V DETECT
16 X IN
17 XOUT
13 XCIN
14 XCOUT
44
41BATT INFO AD
28CAM PW LED
27VTR PW LED
26MAIN SW 0
25MAIN SW 1
VTR PW LED
CAM PW LED
24MAIN SW 2
21EJECT SW
VREF
43VCC
15
2RMC PULSE IN
6 LANC PW CONT
22
LANC
ON
34 REC CTL
31 EVF BL ON
47 LCD BL ON
46 LCD ON
48 VTR ON
9 SOUT2
8 SIN2SO
SI
SCK
SCK
SO
7 SCLK2
3 SUB REQ
1 SUB CS
RESET
X2024MHz
X10020MHz
X20132.768KHz
IC203M37516M4
SUB MI-COM
TO AV SECTION
TO CAMERA SECTION
2
SW101
MENU DIAL
1
3
6
5
4
PAE/GREENCN200
12START/STOP SW 11
AD KEY 2 7MO 5VMO 5V 5LI 3V 1
CAM PW LED 2VTR PW LED 4MAIN SW 0 10MAIN SW 1 9MAIN SW 2 8EJECT SW 26EJECT SW 27
LANC DCCN3302
25LANC OUT 26
EJECTEJECT
MENU
SW102
DVDD 4.7VDVDD 4.7VCN100
10RMC IN 11
TALLY LED 12CAP VS 22CAP VS 23CAP ON 20
REC PROOF 18CAP FWD 24SEL CSLP 26SELCSLP 27
CFG 21MSW AD 13
TAPE LED 25TAPE END 17TAPE TOP 16
DA CFG 19
DRUM VSCN101
4DRUM VS 5DRUM ON 6
DPG 8DFG 7
LMO CONT 17UNLOAD 16
LOAD 15S REEL TG 2T REEL TG 1
DEW 24DEW 25
CAS IN 9REEL LED CONT 3
MIC ON 21MIC 3 20MIC 2 19MIC 1 18
DA S REEL 12VTR UNREGVTR UNREG 10
MO 5VMO 5V 11DVDD 3V 13DVDD 3VDVDD 3V 14
4
Q201
8
7
81
VCCXCS
2XCK
3DI
4DO
RESET
GND
6
5
3
6
5
2
IC200S 8423RFS
E3V REG. & RESET
IC201AK5440BHEEPROM
VOLTAGEDETECT
3V REG
VTR UNREG
DVDD3.0V
3V REGSW
LITHIUM 3VRESET
Q207
Q207
VOLTAGEDETECT
E 3V
CAM ON
DERR
CERR
D VS
C VS
DRUM VS
DPG
CAP VS
CPG
DFG
FU2302
FU2301
4 31 2
4 31 2
14
11
TOSERVO SECTIONSUB P.C.B. (2/2)CN304
TOSERVO SECTIONMMC P.C.B. (2/3)CN11
TOSERVO SECTIONMULTI P.C.B. (1/2)CN93
DATA COMMUNICATION
SYSCON SECTION ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
CANON INC. 2001C01 Sep. 2001
CAPSTAN SERVO SIGNAL
DRUM SERVO SIGNAL SUB P.C.B. (2/2)
MMC P.C.B.(2/3)
MULTI P.C.B.(1/2)LI P.C.B.
DMC I I
PGFG
FG
DRUMMOTOR
LOADINGMOTOR
CAPSTANMOTOR
MAINDIAL
REMOTE CONTROLER
MODE SW
S-REEL
T-REEL
DEW SENSOR
MIC
SAFETYSW
CASSETTE IN SW
CN301U 11U 10V 9V 8W 2W 1
COIL COM 3DPG 6DFG 7
SENS COM 5
CN302LOAD (+) 1LOAD (-) 2
DEW 5
CN300TR E 1TR C 4
TR LED A 3TR LED K 2REC PRF 5
C IN 8MIC3 7MIC2 9MIC1
DVDD3V
DVDD 4.7V
DVDD 3VLED 01
DVDD 3V
MICON
Q303SWITCH
Q306
Q304 Q302
10
CN303U 7U 8V 30V 31W 32W 33U+ 2U- 1V+ 4V- 3W+ 11W- 10H+ 5H- 9
C FG1 22C FG2 24
SR LED ADVDD 3.0V
DVDD 3V
DVDD 3V
DVDD 3V
DVDD 3V
LOD (+ )
DVDD 3VDVDD 3V
LOD (- )
28SR LED K 29
SR E 26SR C 27
B&EOT C 19EOT E 18BOT E 20LED A 13LED K 14
MSW VSS 15MSW VCC 16
MSW SENS 17
IC301S 81256GPU
5.6V REGULATOR
IC300LB1190W
MOTOR DRIVE
60
16
28
59
58
56
23
30
DVS
CVS
DRUM ON
U
W
COM
DPG
VU,V,W,
DRIVER
POWERSW
POWERSW
FWD/RVSSW
DRIVERDECORDER
TIMINGCONT
POSITIONDETECT
PG AMP
U.V.W.DRIVER
HALLPOWER
35
44
22
2
40
12
36
4
9
8
64
3
SELCSLP
VCC1
DVDD3.0V
32
31
41
55
3 3
DPG
V REG
VCC2
U
53V
51
50
49
W
U+
U-
48
47
V+
V-
46
45
42
43
W+
W-
10
11
7
6
2
RU01
3
H+
37CFG2
LOD-
LOD+
38
61
5
63
CFG1
VCC POW 5V
H-
INOUT VTR UNREG
PG AMP
CN11 CN14
MO 5V
PAE/GREEN 4START/STOP SW 5
FOCUS 10EXP 9
MO 5V 3LI 3V 6
CAM PW LED 1VTR PW LED 2
CN13MAIN SW 0 4MAIN SW 1 1MAIN SW 2 2
PAE/GREEN13START/STP SW14
CN93 CN91TODOCKING UNIT
LANC DC 16LANC OUT 15
LANC DC2LANC OUT1
AD KEY 218MO 5V20LI 3V24LI 3V25
CAM PW LED23VTR PW LED21MAIN SW 015MAIN SW 116MAIN SW 217
CN1
SW2
SW1
MO 5V
POWER
PAE/GREEN5START/STOP SW4
MO 5V6LI 3V
CAM PW LEDVTR PW LED
387
FOCUS EXPPAE/GREEN
START/STOP
LITHIUMBATTERY
DVDD 4.7VCN304
41RMC IN40
TALLY LED39CAP VS29CAP VS28CAP ON31
REC PROOF33CAP FWD27SELCSLP25
CFG30MSW AD38
TAPE LED26TAPE END34TAPE TOP35
DA CFG32DRUM VS21DRUM VS20DRUM ON19
DPG17DFG18
LMO CONT8UNLOAD9
LOAD10S REEL TG23T REEL TG24
DEW1CAS IN16
REEL LED CONT22MIC ON4MIC 35MIC 26MIC 17
DA S REEL13VTR UNREG15
MO 5V14DVDD 3V12DVDD 3V11
DVDD 4.7V
VTR UNREG
MO 5V
DVDD 3V
Q300
Q307
Q307
Q305
EOT DET
Q301
BOT DET
DFGDPG
DRUM VS
CFG
CAP VS
TOSYSCON SECTIONMAIN P.C.B.CN100
TOSYSCON SECTIONMAIN P.C.B.CN101
TOSYSCON SECTIONMAIN P.C.B.CN3302
TOSYSCON SECTIONMAIN P.C.B.CN200
SERVO SECTION ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
CANON INC. 2001C01 Sep. 2001
DV SIGNAL
DIGITAL AUDIO SIGNAL
ANALOG AUDIO SIGNAL
ANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL
A 3V SP 5V
5V
DVDD 4.7V
5V
DVDD 4.7V
A 4.7V
VCC VCC VREFL
AUDIO P.C.B.
MULTI P.C.B. (2/2) JACK FPC
11
15 16
2 1 63 62 61 60
25
56
32
27
38
30
43
64
17 18 19 20 58
53
552321
13
6
4
3
1452
50
49
28
29
48
47
51
42
Q852,Q853,Q854
Q801Q802
IC803Q851
Q803Q804Q805
MUTEOFF
DELAY
DATA COMMUNICATION
MICUNIT
TODOCKINGUNIT
IC802PCM3006A/D, D/A
CONVERTER
IC801LA74200W
AUDIOINTERFACE
IC701(2/2)NJM4580E
BUFFER
IC701(1/2)NJM4580E
L.P.F.
EXT CONT
CN801
56
3987
111440351516301329
3128252638
3433323622212324
+
HPF
HPF
ALC
LPF
MUTEMUTE
MUTE
L
L
R
MUTE
BUZZER SHUTTER
RMUTE
MUTE
MUTE
HP COM
ALC
MUTE
MUTE
MATRIX
LPF
LPF
LPF
EVR
EVR
AV DATA
LOGICCONTROL
39
MUTE 46
AV CLK 41
AIF CS 44
Q855
Q808,Q809,Q810,Q811
Q812,Q813Q814,Q815
Q856
REF
REF
EXT
EXT
EXT
INT
INTINT
EXT
INT
ON
ON
OFFWIND CUT
OFFWIND CUT
PB
ALCOFF
ALCOFFMIC
MIC
LINE
LINE
REC
REC
PB
MASTER CLOCK
6
12
7
11
8
9
DE-EMP0 18
DE-EMP1 17
3
15
10
SERIALI/O
D/A
19
20
A 3V
DVDD 4.7VA/D
6
57
2
31
A M CLK
VTR UNREGVTR UNREG
SP -SP +
A MUTESHUTTER 1
BEEP 2BEEP 1
BEEP LEVELAIF CS
S CLK 2S OUT 2A EMP 2A EMP 1
XPD DA
AUD OAUD I
EXT CONT
LRCKWCK
XPD AD
AUDIO RAUDIO L
DVDD 4.7VA 3VA 3V
CN701MIC L4
L
R
CMIC C5MIC R2
CN8028 HP R2 EXT MIC L7 HP L36
EXT MIC RHP COM
CN928HP R2EXT MIC L7HP L36
EXT MIC RHP COM
CN939Y I /O7C I /O6S DET54
EXT DETHP DET
CN9123 Y I /O21 C I /O20 S DET191882736
EXT DETHP DET
HP REXT MIC L
HP LEXT MIC R
HP COM
P-ON/OFFMUTE
5VREGURATOR
A 3V
VDD
543
6
21
VIDEO
DETAUDIO R
AUDIO L
CN3401DV
TERMINAL
TOVIDEO SECTIONMAIN P.C.B. (2/3:CAMERA, SS SECTION)CN3302
TOVIDEO SECTIONMAIN P.C.B. (2/3:CAMERA, SS SECTION)CN3301
BEEPLEVEL
+
-
+
-
+
-
+
-
AUDIO SECTION ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
CANON INC. 2001C01 Sep. 2001
DV SIGNALDIGITAL (VIDEO + AUDIO) SIGNAL
DIGITAL AUDIO SIGNALANALOG AUDIO SIGNAL
DIGITAL VIDEO SIGNALANALOG VIDEO SIGNAL
COM
47453732312620117
48
46
17
15
12 13 14
19
34
21
40
2
4
36
25
30
27
10
31
53
96
68
97
74
33
90
73
9
8
7
55
184 185 186 54 75 76 77 78 144 243 244 116
29
35
98
14
114
16993
140
141
16
79
118
39
181
182
159
134
179
17
209
210
44
86
127
148
43
170
85
128
107
190
147
167
189
188
64
109
106
46
111
149
104
99
38
18
62
61
81
60
40
19
103
84
100
82
105
83
120
119
146
121
101
176
175
173
152
129
108
72
24
249
204
165
63
71
51
207
247
229
248
227
48
125
126
115
154
235
213
193
214
133
2
1
9
1
34
32
35
112
238
217
196
194
222200 178183 180234201 15622528 59 70 91 123 208 219 224 246 240
237
245
2
17
21
42
43
3029 13 232226258281211
5
8
19
20
14
13
15
4
3
2
1
18
17
16
5
4
45
46
36
2
4
5
385
1211
14
10
15
9
4
13
2
1
5
316
61
60
8
25
23
24
22
21
105
109
110
103
20
19
43
42
144
128
145
143
92
94
93
87
90
127
80
83
91
37
36
32
33
31
29
30
40
41
39
38
28
26
27
160
161
162
68 7277 84 86 2
194
15
3
18
44
4
45
9163
76
70
71
73
74
67196
46 139
47
58
72
5
71
70
59
57
14 15 16
34
36
32
42
60
61
62
64
65
46
66
67
68
11
22
5519 20633741
21
8 9
15
4
3
5
2
3
1
MMC P.C.B.(3/3)
MAIN P.C.B.(2/3:CAMERA, SS SECTION)
DATA COMMUNICATION
IC2600BU2991
CHARACTERGENERATOR
IC1503MC74HC4053
SWITCH
IC1502CXA3503R
EVF DRIVER
IC1501MB88347PFV
D/A CONVERTER
IC2601S.75V04ANCINVERTER
IC100(3/3)M32120MCWGD52A MC32120MCWGD52B
DM-IXY DV2ELURA20 MC ADM-MV4i MC E
ELURA10 ADM-MV4 EDM-MV4i E
MAIN MI-COM
IC2000LD502W
VRP2
IC2100LD502U
VIF2
IC2301MBG102
VIC2
DRUM UNIT
DVDD 3V
DVDD 1.7V
DIF 3V AVDD 2.3V
VDD
OSC
VD
HD
DSPCHARADSPFRAME
CLAMP
BPF
EQ LPF
Y/C SEP
C SYNC SEP
SERIAL DATADATA CSCLK
27MHz
HA 4.7V
EPH
R
G
GDH
CO
NT 1
GDL
CO
NT
GDH
CO
NT 2
EQ C
ONT
2
EQ C
ONT
1
RAG
C
RAPC
AQAC
RCLK
XRCL
K
RAFC
CLAMP
LUMINANCE
CHROMINANCE
B
SP -SP +
CN15SP -SP +
CN200SP -SP +
CN11
A M CLK
VTR UNREGVTR UNREG
SP -
VTR UNREG
DVDD4.7VA3V
SP +A MUTE
SHUTTER 1BEEP 2BEEP 1
BEEP LEVELAIF CS
S CLK 2S OUT 2A EMP 2A EMP 1
XPD DA
AUD OAUD I
EXT CONT
LRCKWCK
XPD AD
AUDIO RAUDIO L
DVDD 4.7VA 3VA 3V
SDL
PB ON
HA 4.7VHA 3V
RESE
T
VCC
DATA
CS
CLK
SOUT 1
OSDC CS
SCLK1
CG B
CG G
CGFRAME
CG R
SWP
PBRF
H1A
H1B
H2A
H2B
REC CONTRECON
VDD
DVDD 3V
B
B
G
G
R R
B
G
R
DVDD 3V
X230224.576MHz
PANEL GPANEL B
SCLK1SOUT1
LCD EEP CSLCD CEN
SIN1COM ADJPLL ADJLCD 3VLCD 3V
LCD 12VLCD ON
LCD BL ONLCD UNREGLCD UNREGLCD UNREG
CN3302
21 S DET23 HP DET22 EXT DET7
11
1
1314
1720
432
AUDIO RAUDIO L
XTP A
PLUG INV I /O
TP ATP B
XTP B
Y I /OC I /O
B DATA 5B DATA 6B DATA 7
27M
SHUTTER 1TRSTTMS
VIC TDOTCK
VIF 4.7V
HA 4.7V
VCC
GCA
Y CONT
CLAMP C CONT
75W 75W 75W
Q2102 Q2101 Q2100
Q2104 Q2301
Q2103
Q2105
Q2106
B DATA 0B DATA 1B DATA 2
A DATA 5A DATA 6A DATA 7
A DATA 2A DATA 3A DATA 4
A DATA 0A DATA 1
B DATA 3B DATA 4
H1B2
CN2000H1A
3H2A 5H2B 6
CH-1HEAD
CH-2HEAD
HA 4.7V
CKO
CKI
LCD 12V
BEEP
1
BEEP
2
TO SS SECTIONIC201-1-4(EEPROM)
FROM SS SECTION(MAIN P.C.B)
R OUT
G OUT
B OUT
CGMIX BRIGHT
TIMINGGENERATOR
CONTRAST
LPF
CHROMA
REF
BLK
HCK1
HCK2
HST
RGT
TST9
FNB
TST17
VCK
VST
SCLK1
EVFSEN
SOUT1
SCLK1
SIN1
SOUT1
EVF SEN
EVF DA LOAD
MAIN EEP CS
LCD CEN
LCD EEP CS
OSDC CS
SCK
OSD R
OSD G
OSD B
SEN
SDAT
LCD 3V
Q1507
Q1501
Q1508CLAMP
LOGIC
Q1503MO 5V
Q1502
R/R-Y
R
G/Y
B/B-Y
G
B
R
G
B
CN1502TOLCD-CVF SECTIONLCD P.C.B.CN902
1415212625242019
4
711
1265
13
1716
10
LCD 12V
LCD 3V
VTR UNREG
98
18
14
13
12
RCN1501
14G 15
BL 5V 17BL 5V 18
B 13COM 16BLK 12
HCK 1 11HCK 2 10
HST 9RGT 8
TEST1(DWN) 7
TEST2(STB) 5VCK 4
VDDLCD 12V 1VST 3
EN 6
DIF3V
DVDD3V
DVDD4.7V
HA3V
HA4.7V
A3V
LCD12V
LCD3V
DVDD1.7V
E3V
VTR UNREG
AVDD2.3V
LCD ONLCD BL ON
DA CFGDA SREEL
EVF BL ONREC CTL
DIF3VDVDD3V
DVDD4.7VHA3V
HA4.7VA3V
LCD12VLCD3V
DVDD1.7VE3V
VTR UNREG
AVDD2.3V
E 3V
XRCL
K
RCLK
RAFC
RAPC
RAG
C
AQAC
EQ C
ONT
2
EQ C
ONT
1
GDL
CO
NT
GDH
CO
NT 1
GDH
CO
NT 2
X230227MHz
1211
12
1314
IC203SUB MI-COM
(SS SECTION) SO
SCK
Q1505
Q1504
LCD 3V
DVDD 4.7V
PANEL RC SYNC
PNL OPEN SWPNL BT SW
TOAUDIO SECTIONJACK FPC
TOAUDIO SECTIONMULTI P.C.B. (2/2)CN93
FROMCAMERA SECTIONMAIN P.C.B.
TOAUDIO SECTIONAUDIO P.C.B.CN801
EQGDL
VCO
B DATA 7
B DATA 6
B DATA 5
B DATA 4
B DATA 3
B DATA 2
B DATA 1
B DATA 0
A DATA 7
A DATA 6
A DATA 5
A DATA 4
A DATA 3E DATA 5
E DATA 11
E DATA 10
E DATA 9
E DATA 8
XRESET
E DATA 15
E DATA 14
E DATA 13
E DATA 12
E DATA 7
E DATA 6
AMCK
DVDD HB 1
DVDD HB 2
DVDD HC 1
DVDD HC 2
DVDD HD 11
DVDD HD 12
DVDD HA 1
DVDD HA 2
DVDD HA 3
DVDD HA 4
DVDD HA 5
DVDD HA 6
DVDD HA 7
DVDD HA 8
WCK
LRCK
AUD 1 O
AUD 1 I
VCLKXECSV
UTIL7
XECSI
XEWR
SDLSEL
XRDAT
PB H
REC H
RDAT
XERD
DVDD HA 9
DVDD HA 10
DVDD HA 11
DVDD HA 12
UTIL
0
UTIL
2
UTIL
1
UTIL
4
UTIL
3
RAG
C
RAPC
UTIL
5
RCLK
DVDD
L1
DVDD
L2
DVDD
L3
DVDD
L4
DVDD
L5
DVDD
L6
DVDD
L7
DVDD
L8
XRCL
K
UTIL
6
VRLSW
VRL 2
VRH 2
VD
C 0
Y 0
C IN
CLAMP Y
Y IN
CSNC 1
VCLK 0
VCLK 1
OSDI0
AVDD
B1
AVDD
B2
AVDD
B3
AVDD
A1
AVDD
A2
AVDD
A3
AVDD
A4
AVDD
A5
AVDD
C
AVDD
D1
AVDD
D2
VDD
PLL
1
VDD
PLL
2
HD
VF B
VF G
VF R
CSYNCO
OSDI1
EADDR 3
EADDR 2
EADDR 1
EADDR 0
XINTO C
XINTO D
XINTO M
TCK
TMS
TRST
TDI
TDO
DOTCLK
IXI
IXO
XTPB
TPB
XTPA
TPA
A DATA 2
A DATA 1
A DATA 0
EADDR 5
EADDR 4
E DATA 4
E DATA 3
E DATA 2
E DATA 1
E DATA 0
EADDR 6
OSDC/EEPROM/DA SCK
OSDC/EEPRO VI/DA SO
EEPROM SI
PANEL IC CS
PANEL EEPROM CS
OSDC CS
EVF SEV
EVF DA LOAD
MAIN EEPROM CS
HP D
ET
VIF
CS
RAGC
VCO HI
AIF/
VIF/
SUB
SO
AIF/
VIF/
SUB
SCK
A M
UTE
BUZA
ER C
ARRI
ER1
BUZA
ER C
ARRI
ER1
EXT
CONT
PLUG
IN
S DE
T
EXT
DET
XRESET
VIC XEWR
VIC XERD
XECSV
XECSI
BEEP
LED
EL
XPD AD
A EMP2
A EMP1
XPD DA
LET
CONT
LINE
IN
WID
E CO
NT
WID
E DE
T
AIF
CS
TCK
TMS
TRST
TDI
PANEL BOTTOH/TOP SW
PANEL OPEN SW
MIRR
E ADDR 0
E DATA 0
E ADDR 6
OSDC RESET
XINT M
XINT C
XINT D
E DATA 15
56
3987
111440351516301329
3128252638
3433323622212324
VCC1
VDD
VCC3
CSYN
C
VDD2
VDD
VCC
SCLK1SOUT1SIN1
MEIN EEP CS
VDD
VCC
DA CFG
LCP
RL
SW F
COM
PLL
DI
CLK
LD
TOLCD-CVF SECTIONCVF P.C.B.CN4101
SCLK1
SOUT1
EVF DA LOAD
S0SCK
GCA
CN3301
SCK
SO
VIF
CS
CLAMP C
MM TD0
WIDE DET
LINE
IN
WIDE CONT
LETTER CONT
VIDEO SECTION ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
CANON INC. 2001C01 Sep. 2001
OPEN
CLOSE
INVERT
INVERT CLOSE
Hi(OFF) Hi(OFF)
LO(ON)
LO(ON) LO(ON)
LO(ON)
Hi(OFF)
Hi(OFF)
PNL OPEN SW PNL BT SW
DATA COMMUNICATION
LCD P.C.B.
CVF P.C.B.
Q4203SWITCH
Q4202DRIVER
Q4204DRIVER
Q903
Q904
Q902
R CLAMP
CNTRST GAMMA S/H
IC901AK6420AMEEPROM
IC4201AN8016NSH
DC/DC CONVERTER
IC902LV4135W
LCD DRIVE
60
10
62
30
785
4
3
2
1
5
7
T4201CPU9D25
6
4
3
2
1
5
8
51
35
39 9
12V 3V
14 49
34
30
29
28
27
26
25
22
21
20
19
18
17
50
11
12
59
58
40
43
45
CS
DI
VCC
16
5
IN-OUT
VCC
10FB
4 ON/OFF
GND
SK
DO
Q902
LCD 3V
12V
LCD 3V
VRCN903
CN901
VGVB
VCOM
PNL BT SWLCD 3V
PNL OPEN SWLCD 3V
HVDDVVDD
2124
WP4201
WP4202
23
22
1816 MAGNET
(MAIN BODYSIDE)
HALL IC(PANEL SIDE)10
19
452378
176
25131112
6431
PANEL G
CN902TOVIDEO SECTIONMAIN P.C.B.CN1502
TOVIDEO SECTIONMAIN P.C.B.CN1501
216
1213
PANEL B3SCLK17SOUT18
LCD EEP CS10LCD CEN11
SIN1
CLKSO
E CS
L CS
CLK
SO
CS
BRIGHT
R OUT
G OUT
B OUT
G CLAMP AGC
GCA
GCA
B
CLKCONTROL
CSYNC
D1
PDPLL ADJ
LCD UNREG
LCD 3V
LCD UNREG
OSC
/O
OSC
/I
VC C
PCD
VDD1
VDD2
VCC1
VSY/I
XSTH
SHT
CKH 2
CKH 1
PCG 2
PCG 1
XSTV
STV
CKV 2
CKV 1
KENB
ENB
CSYO
CSHO
XSTHSHT
CKH 2CKH 1PCG 2PCG 1XSTVSTV
CKV 2CKV 1KENBENB
CSYOCSHO
E CS
CLK
SO
SO
CENSI9
COM ADJ17PLL ADJ18LCD 3V19LCD 3V20
LCD 12V16LCD ON14
LCD BL ON15LCD UNREG21LCD UNREG22LCD UNREG23
CVFPANEL
BACKLIGHT
Q4101
Q4103
LED DRIVE
LED DRIVE
RG
BL 5VBL 5V
BCOMBLK
HCK 1HCK 2
HSTRGT
TEST1(DWN)
TEST2(STB)VCKVST
EN
CN41013476859
1011
131415161718
VDD20
12
CN4102
FN 4101
R 14G 15B 13
12
COM 16
BLK 12HCK 1 11HCK 2 10
RGT 8TEST1(DWN) 7
EN 6TEST2(STB) 5
VCK 4VSTVDD
31
HST 9
BL 5VLED
LCD 3V
LCD 12V
3V
12V
LCD UNREG
SI/F
CLAMP
PLL
PD
OSC
LCD
BACK LIGHT
LCD UNIT
PWM
PLL
TIMINGGENERATOR
PANEL RC SYNC
PNL OPEN SWPNL BT SW
+
-
LCD-CVF SECTION ELURA20 MC A, ELURA10 A
CANON INC. 2001C01 Sep. 2001